JP2021087895A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of improving a degree of attention of a player to a game.SOLUTION: A game machine includes: shooting means for shooting a game ball to a game area formed on a game board; start ball entry means for the entry of a game ball falling down in the game area, which executes an internal lottery in the entry of a game ball; and game state transition means for transitioning a game state on the basis of a result of the internal lottery. The game state includes a low frequency support mode and a high frequency support mode which is more advantageous for a player than the low frequency support mode. The result of the internal lottery includes a low frequency support mode result for transitioning the game state to either the low frequency support mode or the high frequency support mode, and a high frequency support mode result for transitioning the game state to the high frequency support mode.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 20

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine.

Conventionally, a launching means for launching a game ball toward a game area formed on a game board, and a starting ball entry means for inserting a game ball flowing down the game area and executing an internal lottery when the game ball enters. A gaming machine equipped with the above is known (see, for example, Patent Document 1).
The gaming machine executes an internal lottery such as a jackpot lottery when the gaming ball enters the starting ball entry means, and shifts the gaming state based on the result of the internal lottery. In such a gaming machine, the gaming state has a low frequency support mode (first gaming state) and a high frequency support mode (second gaming state) that is more advantageous for the player than the low frequency support mode. ing. Therefore, the player will play the game with the expectation that the mode will shift to the high frequency support mode.

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2011-23536

However, since the first gaming state and the transition destination of the second gaming state are associated with the result of the internal lottery, there is a problem that the player's attention to the game is lowered.

An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the player's attention to the game.

The gaming machine of the present invention inserts a launching means for launching a gaming ball toward a gaming area formed on a gaming board and a gaming ball flowing down the gaming area, and executes an internal lottery when entering the gaming ball. It is a gaming machine including a starting ball entry means to be started and a gaming state transition means for shifting the gaming state based on the result of the internal lottery, and the gaming state is from the first gaming state and the first gaming state. Also has a second gaming state that is advantageous to the player, and the results of the internal lottery are the first lottery result that shifts the gaming state to either the first gaming state or the second gaming state, and the second. It is characterized by including a second lottery result for shifting the gaming state to the gaming state of.
It is characterized by that.

According to the present invention, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

Front view of the pachinko machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. Front view of the game board Enlarged view of the vicinity of the right variable ball entry mechanism Diagram showing the display screen of the symbol display device Block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a pachinko machine Diagram showing the contents of each counter used in the internal lottery The figure which shows the electric service winning / failing table which memorized the value of the random number which wins the electric service opening occurrence The figure which shows the winning / failing table which stored the value of the random number which wins the hit occurrence The figure which shows the distribution table which stored the value of the random number which concerns on the distribution destination of a hit type The figure which shows the flowchart of timer interrupt processing The figure which shows the flowchart of the winning process for a working opening The figure which shows the flowchart of a normal process Diagram showing the flowchart of the main process The figure which shows the flowchart of the game time control process The figure which shows the flowchart of the data setting process The figure which shows the flowchart of the fluctuation start processing The figure which shows the flowchart of the game state transition process The figure which shows the flowchart of the big prize opening opening and closing process The figure which shows the flowchart of the big prize opening opening process The figure which shows the flowchart of the transition process at the end of the open / close execution mode The figure which shows the flowchart of the variable ball entry execution process The figure which shows the flowchart of the fluctuation end processing Block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the voice emission control device and the display control device The figure which shows the flowchart of the timer interrupt processing executed by the voice light emission control device. The figure which shows the flowchart of the production decision processing The figure which shows the flowchart of the decision process of the effect for opening / closing execution mode Diagram showing the relationship between the game result and the game state, etc. The figure which shows the production for the game round when the game ball wins a prize in the lower actuating opening by the prize to the through gate as a trigger in the high frequency support mode. Enlarged view showing the periphery of the right variable ball entry mechanism The figure which shows the effect for opening / closing execution mode when a game ball wins a prize (V prize) in the right entrance. Diagram showing the production for game rounds when staying in the special mode The figure which shows the flowchart of the transition process at the end of the opening / closing execution mode which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. The figure which shows the flowchart of the production decision processing The figure which shows the flowchart of the decision process of the effect for opening / closing execution mode Diagram showing the relationship between the game result and the game state, etc. The figure which shows the effect for opening / closing execution mode when a game ball wins a prize (V prize) in the right entrance. Diagram showing the production for game rounds when staying in the special mode The figure which shows the flowchart of the transition process at the end of the opening / closing execution mode which concerns on 3rd Embodiment of this invention. The figure which shows the flowchart of the fluctuation end processing The figure which shows the flowchart of the production decision processing The figure which shows the flowchart of the decision process of the effect for opening / closing execution mode Diagram showing the relationship between the game result and the game state, etc. The figure which shows the effect for opening / closing execution mode when a game ball wins a prize (V prize) in the right entrance. Diagram showing the production for game rounds when staying in the special mode The figure which shows the flowchart of the transition process at the end of the opening / closing execution mode which concerns on 4th Embodiment of this invention. The figure which shows the flowchart of the game count counter setting process The figure which shows the flowchart of the production decision processing The figure which shows the flowchart of the decision process of the effect for opening / closing execution mode Diagram showing the relationship between the game result and the game state, etc. The figure which shows the effect for opening / closing execution mode when a game ball wins a prize (V prize) in the right entrance. The figure which shows the production for the game round when the game ball wins a prize in the lower actuating opening by the prize to the through gate as a trigger in the high frequency support mode.

[First Embodiment]
Hereinafter, the first embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.
FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention.
The pachinko machine 10 is a pachinko gaming machine that is a kind of gaming machine. As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 forming an outer shell of the pachinko machine 10 and a gaming machine main body rotatably attached to the outer frame 11 in the front (front side). It has 12 and.

The gaming machine main body 12 is arranged in front of an inner frame (not shown) supported by an outer frame 11 so that one of the left and right side portions can be rotated as a support side, and both left and right sides. The front door frame 13 is supported by the inner frame so that one of the portions can be rotated forward with one of the portions as the support side, and the front door frame 13 is arranged behind the inner frame. It is equipped with a back pack unit (not shown) that is supported by an inner frame so that it can rotate to.

The gaming machine main body 12 is provided with a locking device (not shown) provided at its rotating tip. This locking device has a function of locking the gaming machine main body 12 so that it cannot be opened with respect to the outer frame 11, and also has a function of locking the front door frame 13 so that it cannot be opened with respect to the inner frame. Have. These locked states are released by performing an unlocking operation using the unlocking key on the cylinder lock 14 provided exposed on the front surface of the pachinko machine 10.

The front door frame 13 has a substantially elliptical window portion 21 provided so as to cover the entire front surface side of the inner frame, and a window panel 22 fitted in the window portion 21. In the present embodiment, the window panel 22 is made colorless and transparent by glass, but may be formed colorless and transparent by synthetic resin or the like.
Further, the front door frame 13 has a display lamp unit 23 provided above the window unit 21 as a part of light emitting means composed of various lamp units provided around the window unit 21, and a display lamp unit. A speaker unit 24 provided on both the left and right sides of the 23 and outputting sound effects and the like according to the game situation, and an upper bulging portion 25 and a lower bulging portion 26 provided below the window portion 21 are provided. There is.

The upper bulging portion 25 and the lower bulging portion 26 are arranged side by side on the upper and lower sides, and are provided so as to bulge forward together.
The upper bulging portion 25 has an upper plate 25a provided inside so as to open upward, and a push button 25b that receives information input by being operated by a player. The upper plate 25a temporarily stores the game balls paid out by the payout device 71 (see FIG. 5) provided in the back pack unit, and moves to the game ball launch mechanism 81 (see FIG. 5) side while arranging them in a row. It has a function to guide. The push button 25b functions as an operating means for executing an expected effect that makes the player expect that the game state will be shifted to a specific control state that is advantageous to the player by being operated by the player.
The lower bulging portion 26 also has a lower plate 26a provided inside so as to open upward. The lower plate 26a has a function of storing excess game balls in the upper plate 25a.

Further, the front door frame 13 includes a firing handle 27 as a launching means provided on the right side of the lower plate 26a. The launch handle 27 launches a game ball from the game ball launch mechanism 81 provided below the inner frame toward the game area provided above the inner frame by being operated by the player of the pachinko machine 10. To do. The firing handle 27 changes the firing intensity of the gaming ball to be launched toward the gaming area, that is, the firing momentum, by changing the amount of rotation operation thereof.

FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board.
As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 31 has an inner rail portion 32 and an outer rail portion 33 attached to the surface thereof, and is mounted on the inner frame. The game area described above is formed on the game board 31 so as to be partitioned by the inner rail portion 32 and the outer rail portion 33. In this game area, substantially the entire area can be visually recognized from the front through the window portion 21.
The inner rail portion 32 and the outer rail portion 33 constitute a guide rail 34 for the game ball to the game area, and the guide rail 34 is launched from the game ball launch mechanism 81 by the player rotating the launch handle 27. Guide the played game ball to the upper part of the game area.

The guide rail 34 is formed so that its exit portion is arranged on one side of the game area and faces the upper center of the game area. Therefore, the arrival position of the game ball in the upper part of the game area is from the side of the side where the exit portion of the guide rail 34 is formed to the opposite side as the amount of rotation of the firing handle 27 by the player increases. It shifts to the side of the side. In the present embodiment, the exit portion of the guide rail 34 is provided on the left side portion of the game area.

The game board 31 has a plurality of large and small openings formed so as to penetrate in the front-rear direction by being subjected to router processing in the game area. Further, the game board 31 includes a general winning opening 35, an upper operating opening (first starting ball entry portion) 36, a lower operating opening (second starting ball entry portion) 37, and a variable winning device 38 provided in each opening. And has an out port 39. Further, the game board 31 is provided on the right side variable ball entry mechanism 40 provided above the variable winning device 38, two through gates 41 provided on the left side of the central portion and the right side of the central portion, and the upper right side. It has a main display device 42, a variable display unit 43 provided in the center, and the like. Further, the game board 31 has a large number of nails 44 planted for appropriately dispersing or adjusting the falling direction of the game ball, and various members (roles) such as a windmill in the game area. ing.

Each of the general winning opening 35, the upper operating opening 36, the lower operating opening 37, and the various winning openings of the variable winning device 38 includes detection sensors 50a to 50d (see FIG. 5) for detecting the entry of a game ball. The detection sensors 50a to 50d are arranged on the back side of the game board 31. Specifically, the general winning opening 35 is provided with a detection sensor 50a, the upper operating port 36 is provided with a detection sensor 50b, the lower operating port 37 is provided with a detection sensor 50c, and the variable winning device 38 is a detection sensor 50d. It has. The pachinko machine 10 pays out a predetermined number of prize balls based on the detection results of the detection sensors 50a to 50d. The detection sensors 50a to 50d may be any type as long as they can individually detect the winning of the game ball, and for example, an electromagnetic induction type proximity sensor or the like can be adopted.

Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 pays out 10 prize balls when a ball enters the general prize opening 35. The pachinko machine 10 pays out three prize balls when the ball enters the upper operating port 36 and when the ball enters the lower operating port 37. The pachinko machine 10 pays out 15 prize balls when a ball is entered into the variable winning device 38. The number of these prize balls is arbitrary, and for example, the number of prize balls at the operating ports 36 and 37 may be different.

The out port 39 is provided at the bottom of the game area of the game board 31. The game balls that have not entered the various winning openings and the like are discharged from the game area through the out openings 39. Further, the out port 39 includes a detection sensor 50e (see FIG. 5) that detects the entry of a game ball, and the detection sensor 50e is arranged on the back side of the game board 31. The pachinko machine 10 does not pay out the prize balls when the balls enter the out ports 39, unlike the cases where the balls enter the various winning openings.

Each through gate 41 is provided with a detection sensor 50f (see FIG. 5) that detects the entry of a game ball, and when the entry of a game ball occurs, an internal lottery is executed. The detection sensor 50f is arranged on the back side of the game board 31. The pachinko machine 10 does not pay out the prize balls when the balls enter the through gates 41, unlike the case where the balls enter the various winning openings.

Here, the entry ball means that the game ball passes through a predetermined opening, and is not only discharged from the game area after passing through the opening, but also discharged from the game area after passing through the opening. It also includes a mode in which the flow of the game area is continued without flow. However, in the following description, in order to clearly distinguish it from the entry of the game ball into the out opening 39, the entry of the game ball into various winning openings is also referred to as a winning. Further, entering the through gate 41 means that after passing through a gate provided in the game area, the ball continues to flow down the game area without being discharged from the game area. The entry into the through gate 41 is also referred to as winning in the same manner as the entry into various winning openings.

The upper operating port 36 and the lower operating port 37 are unitized as an operating port device and installed on the game board 31. Each of the operating ports 36 and 37 opens upward together so that the game ball flowing down the game area can enter, and the upper operating port 36 is arranged above and the lower operating port 37 is arranged below. It is installed side by side in the vertical direction. The lower operating port 37 has an electric accessory 37a as a guide piece (support piece) composed of a pair of left and right movable pieces.

The electric accessory 37a is connected to an electric accessory drive unit 37b mounted on the back side of the game board 31. The electric accessory 37a is set to either a closed state (non-supported state or non-guided state) or an open state (supported state or guided state) by being driven by the electric accessory driving unit 37b. The closed state is a state in which the lower operating port 37 is closed by bringing the upper ends of the electric accessory 37a close to each other in the left-right direction. The open state is a state in which the lower operating port 37 is opened by separating the upper end of the electric accessory 37a in the left-right direction.

Here, when the electric accessory 37a is set to the closed state, the distance between the upper end of the electric accessory 37a and the bottom surface of the upper operating port 36 is narrower than that of one game ball. Further, when the electric accessory 37a is set to the open state, the distance between the upper end of the electric accessory 37a and the bottom surface of the upper operating port 36 is wider than that of one game ball. Therefore, the game ball cannot win the lower operating port 37 when the electric accessory 37a is set to the closed state, and may win the lower operating port 37 when the electric accessory 37a is set to the open state. it can.

In addition, in the electric accessory 37a, instead of the closed state and the open state described above, a state in which it is difficult for the game ball to win a prize in the lower operating port 37 (a state in which the game ball can be entered unlike the closed state) and a lower state. The operating port 37 may be configured to switch from a state in which a game ball is likely to win a prize. Further, the lower operating port 37 may be configured such that such switching is performed not by setting the electric accessory 37a but by the displacement of the lower operating port 37. In the case of such a configuration, the lower operating port 37 may be configured. 37 does not have to be provided with the electric accessory 37a.

The variable winning device 38 drives a large winning opening 38a that opens upward so that a game ball flowing down the game area can enter, an opening / closing door 38b for opening / closing the large winning opening 38a, and an opening / closing door 38b. It is equipped with a variable winning drive unit 38c.
The player hits the right with the maximum amount of rotation of the launch handle 27, and sets the arrival position of the game ball in the upper part of the game area from the side of the side where the exit portion of the guide rail 34 is formed to the opposite side. By shifting to the side of the side portion, the game ball can be guided to the variable winning device 38, the right variable ball entry mechanism 40, the lower operating port 37, etc., avoiding the variable display unit 43 and the like (right-handed route). ).

Further, the player strikes the launch handle 27 to the left with a medium rotation operation amount, and sets the arrival position of the game ball in the upper part of the game area from the side of the side where the exit portion of the guide rail 34 is formed. By shifting to the upper left, the game ball can be guided to the upper operating port 36, the lower operating port 37, and the like (left-handed route).
As described above, in the present embodiment, the game area is the first path (left) in which it is easy to generate the game ball into the upper operating port 36 and it is difficult to generate the game ball into the lower operating port 37 (left). It is provided with a hitting route) and a second route (right-handed route) in which it is easy to generate a game ball into the lower operating port 37 and it is difficult to generate a game ball into the upper operating port 36. ..

Here, the game board 31 includes a cover 381 provided so as to cover the front side of the variable winning device 38. The cover 381 is provided around a transparent (or translucent) transparent panel 381a so that the variable winning device 38 can be seen from the front side, and the transparent panel 381a, and is opaquely formed. It includes a panel 381b.
Therefore, the player can visually recognize the variable winning device 38 from the front through the transparent panel 381a and the window portion 21.

The grand prize opening 38a is provided in an opening formed in the game area so as to penetrate in the front-rear direction by being subjected to router processing. As described above, the large winning opening 38a includes a detection sensor 50d that detects the entry of a game ball. The pachinko machine 10 pays out a predetermined number of prize balls based on the detection result.

The opening / closing door 38b is formed in a rectangular plate shape, and is provided on the game board 31 so as to close the opening of the large winning opening 38a. The opening / closing door 38b is in a closed state in which the opening of the grand prize opening 38a is closed by advancing toward the window panel 22 and protruding from the game board 31, and is retracted toward the inside of the game board 31. By burying it in 31, it has an open state in which the opening of the large winning opening 38a is opened.
The variable winning drive unit 38c sets the opening / closing door 38b to either an open state or a closed state by driving the opening / closing door 38b.

Specifically, the opening / closing door 38b is normally set in a closed state in which a game ball cannot win a prize. Then, when the shift to the open / close execution mode is won in the internal lottery and the shift to the open / close execution mode is performed, the open / close door 38b is set to the open state in which the game ball can win a prize.
The opening / closing execution mode (specific control state) is a mode in which the opening / closing door 38b is set to the open state and a game ball can be inserted into the large winning opening 38a. Further, in the opening / closing execution mode, after the opening / closing door 38b is set to the open state and then set to the closed state again, it is referred to as one round game.

FIG. 3 is an enlarged view of the vicinity of the right variable ball entry mechanism.
As shown in FIG. 3, the right-side variable ball entry mechanism 40 includes a guide unit 401 that guides a game ball flowing down the game area into the inside of the right-side variable ball entry mechanism 40, and a right-side variable ball entry mechanism 40 by the guidance unit 401. A guide passage 402 that guides the game ball guided to the entrance of the guide passage 402, a switching unit 403 that switches the destination of the game ball guided by the guide passage 402, and a right entrance 404 provided at the guide destination of the guide passage 402. And a left entrance 405.

The guide unit 401 has a blade member 401a provided on the game board 31 so as to close the entrance formed on the right side of the right variable ball entry mechanism 40, and a blade member centered on an axis orthogonal to the board surface of the game board 31. It includes a pin 401b that rotatably supports the 401a and a blade member driving unit 401c that drives the blade member 401a.

The blade member 401a rotates counterclockwise around the pin 401b to close the entrance of the right variable ball entry mechanism 40 (one-dot chain line in the figure) and rotates clockwise around the pin 401b. It has an open state (solid line in the figure) in which the entrance of the right variable entry mechanism 40 is opened by moving. In the open state, the blade member 401a is inclined so as to descend toward the inlet side of the right variable ball entry mechanism 40.
The blade member driving unit 401c sets the blade member 401a to either a closed state or an open state by driving the blade member 401a.

Therefore, when the blade member 401a is set to the open state by the blade member driving unit 401c, the game ball enters the right variable ball entry mechanism 40 through the blade member 401a by utilizing the inclination of the blade member 401a. (Solid line in the figure).
On the other hand, when the blade member 401a is set to the closed state by the blade member driving unit 401c, the game ball does not enter the right variable ball entry mechanism 40 (one-point chain line in the figure).

The guide passage 402 is formed to have a width so that a plurality of game balls cannot pass through the passage at the same time. Further, the guide passage 402 is bifurcated in the middle thereof, and has an upstream guide passage 402a located on the upstream side of the branch and two downstream guide passages 402b and 402c located on the downstream side. ..

The upstream side guide passage 402a guides the game ball guided to the entrance of the right variable entry mechanism 40 by the guidance unit 401 from the entrance of the right variable entry mechanism 40 to the branch position of the guide passage 402. The upstream guide passage 402a is inclined so as to descend from the entrance of the right variable entry mechanism 40 toward the branch position of the guide passage 402. Therefore, the game ball reaches the branch position of the guide passage 402 along the upstream guide passage 402a by utilizing the inclination of the upstream guide passage 402a.

The downstream guide passage 402b is provided at a position close to the blade member 401a. Further, the downstream side guide passage 402b is formed along the vertical direction so as to drop the game ball from the branch position of the guide passage 402. The downstream guide passage 402b guides the game ball that has reached the branch position of the guide passage 402 through the upstream guide passage 402a to the right entry port 404.
The downstream guide passage 402c is provided at a position far from the blade member 401a. Further, the downstream guide passage 402c is formed along the vertical direction so as to drop the game ball from the branch position of the guide passage 402. The downstream guide passage 402c guides the game ball that has reached the branch position of the guide passage 402 through the upstream guide passage 402a to the left entry port 405.

The switching portion 403 rotatably supports the plate 403a provided on the game board 31 so as to close the entrance of the downstream guide passage 402b and the plate 403a about an axis orthogonal to the board surface of the game board 31. It includes a pin 403b and a plate drive unit 403c that drives the plate 403a.

The plate 403a rotates clockwise around the pin 403b to close the entrance of the downstream guide passage 402b (two-dot chain line in the figure) and rotates counterclockwise around the pin 403b. By doing so, the entrance of the downstream guide passage 402c is closed and the entrance of the downstream guide passage 402b is opened (solid line in the figure). In the closed state, the plate 403a is inclined so as to descend toward the downstream guide passage 402c side.
The plate driving unit 403c sets the plate 403a to either the closed state or the open state by driving the plate 403a.

Therefore, when the plate 403a is set to the open state by the plate drive unit 403c, the game ball that has reached the branch position of the guide passage 402 is guided to the entrance of the downstream guide passage 402b, and then the right entry port. Enter the ball at 404 (solid line in the figure).
On the other hand, when the plate 403a is set to the closed state by the plate drive unit 403c, the game ball that has reached the branch position of the guide passage 402 travels downstream along the plate 403a by utilizing the inclination of the plate 403a. After being guided to the entrance of the side guide passage 402c, the ball enters the left entrance 405 (two-dot chain line in the figure).

The right entry port 404 is provided in an opening formed in the game area so as to penetrate in the front-rear direction by being subjected to router processing. The right entry port 404 includes a detection sensor 50g for detecting the entry of a game ball. The pachinko machine 10 does not pay out the prize balls when the ball enters the right entry port 404, unlike the case where the balls enter the various winning openings.

The left entry port 405 is provided in an opening formed in the game area so as to penetrate in the front-rear direction by being subjected to router processing. The game ball that has entered the left entry port 405 merges with the game ball that has passed through the out port 39 described above, and is discharged from the game area. In addition, the pachinko machine 10 does not pay out the prize balls when the ball enters the left entry port 405, unlike the case where the balls enter the various winning openings.

When the pachinko machine 10 enters the right entry port 404, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the open / close execution mode. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 opens / closes the downstream guide passage 402b that guides the game ball to the right entry port 404. The letter "V", which means to shift to the mode, is displayed.
Further, since the pachinko machine 10 does not shift to the open / close execution mode when the ball enters the left entry port 405, the downstream guide passage 402c for guiding the game ball to the left entry port 405 is provided. The character "x" indicating that the mode does not shift to the open / close execution mode is displayed.

Here, the blade member 401a and the plate 403a are usually set in a closed state in which the game ball cannot win a prize. Then, when the player wins the transition to the variable ball entry execution mode in the internal lottery and shifts to the variable ball entry execution mode, the blade member 401a and the plate 403a are set in an open state in which the game ball can win a prize.
In the variable ball entry execution mode, the blade member 401a is set to the open state, the game ball can be inserted into the right variable ball entry mechanism 40, and the plate 403a is set to the open state or the closed state, and the right side. A mode in which a game ball can be inserted into either the entry port 404 or the left entry port 405. Further, in the variable ball entry execution mode, the time (opening period) from setting the plate 403a to the open state to setting it to the closed state again is set to the closed state again after setting the blade member 401a to the open state. It is shorter than the time until it is done (opening period). Specifically, the opening period of the plate 403a is about 1/10 of the opening period of the blade member 401a.

As shown in FIG. 2, the main display device 42 includes a main display unit 45 and an accessory display unit 46, and is a segment display or a dot display in which a plurality of segment light emitting units are arranged in a predetermined manner. It is configured by arranging a plurality of display devices such as.
The main display device 42 is provided on the game board 31 so as to bulge toward the window panel 22 provided on the front side thereof. That is, the main display device 42 can be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko machine 10 via the window panel 22. Further, the distance between the main display device 42 and the window panel 22 is narrower than that of one game ball. As a result, the pachinko machine 10 prevents the game ball from falling between the main display device 42 and the window panel 22. In other words, the pachinko machine 10 prevents the game ball from falling in front of the main display device 42.

The main display unit 45 is a first result display unit 45a for displaying the result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning of the upper operating port 36, and the inside performed based on the winning of the lower operating port 37. It is provided with a second result display unit 45b for displaying the result of the lottery (see FIG. 5). The main display unit 45 may further include a round display unit for clearly indicating the number of round games in the open / close execution mode when the open / close execution mode is set (or the open / close execution mode is set). ..

The first result display unit 45a executes the variation display of the pattern triggered by the winning of the upper operating port 36, and as a result of stopping the variation display, the internal lottery is performed based on the winning of the upper operating port 36. Display the result of. When the result of this internal lottery is the result corresponding to the shift to the open / close execution mode, the first result display unit 45a displays a predetermined stop result. After that, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the open / close execution mode.
The second result display unit 45b executes the variation display of the pattern triggered by the winning of the lower operating port 37, and as a result of stopping the variation display, the internal lottery is performed based on the winning of the lower operating port 37. Display the result of. When the result of this internal lottery is the result corresponding to the transition to the variable ball entry execution mode, the second result display unit 45b displays a predetermined stop result. After that, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the variable ball entry execution mode. Further, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the open / close execution mode when the ball enters the right entry port 404 in the variable entry execution mode.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the upper operating port 36 and the lower operating port 37 function as a starting ball entry means for entering the game ball flowing down the game area and executing an internal lottery when the game ball enters. To do.

The accessory display unit 46 executes a variable display of the pattern triggered by winning a prize in each through gate 41, and as a result of stopping the variable display, an internal lottery is performed based on the winning in each through gate 41. Display the result of. When the result of the internal lottery is the result corresponding to the transition to the electric service open state, the accessory display unit 46 displays a predetermined stop result. After that, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the electric service open state. In this electric service open state, the electric accessory 37a provided in the lower operating port 37 is in the open state in a predetermined mode.

In the present embodiment, the main display unit 45 and the accessory display unit 46 are composed of a segment display, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the liquid crystal display device, the organic EL display device, the CRT, and the like. It may be composed of other types of display devices such as a dot matrix. Further, as the pattern to be variablely displayed on the main display unit 45 and the accessory display unit 46, a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are variablely displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of symbols are variablely displayed, and a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are variablely displayed. , Or a configuration in which multiple types of colors are switched and displayed can be adopted.

The variable display unit 43 includes a symbol display device 51 that variablely displays (variable display or switching display) a symbol that is a type of symbol. Further, the variable display unit 43 includes a center frame 52 arranged so as to surround the symbol display device 51. The upper portion of the center frame 52 is provided so as to bulge toward the window panel 22 provided on the front surface side thereof. As a result, the pachinko machine 10 prevents the game ball from falling in front of the display screen G of the symbol display device 51, and does not cause the inconvenience that the visibility of the display screen G is lowered due to the fall of the game ball. It is composed.

The symbol display device 51 is configured as a liquid crystal display device provided with a liquid crystal display. The symbol display device 51 starts the variable display of the symbol based on the winning of the upper operating port 36 or the lower operating port 37. That is, when the symbol display device 51 executes the variation display on the first result display unit 45a of the main display unit 45 and the variation display on the second result display unit 45b of the main display unit 45, the symbol display device 51 may execute the variation display. The variable display is executed accordingly.
The symbol display device 51 is not limited to the liquid crystal display device, and may be a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, or another display device such as a CRT.

The center frame 52 includes a first holding lamp unit 53 provided in the lower left area of the symbol display device 51, a second holding lamp unit 54 provided in the lower right area of the symbol display device 51, and a symbol display. It is provided with a third holding lamp portion 55 provided in the upper region of the device 51.

The first holding lamp unit 53 is a portion that displays the number of holdings of the winning game balls in the upper operating port 36, and lights up according to the number of holdings. The first holding lamp unit 53 can hold up to four game balls, and corresponds to the variable display of the first result display unit 45a and the symbol display device 51.
The second holding lamp unit 54 is a portion that displays the number of holdings of the winning game balls in the lower operating port 37, and lights up according to the number of holdings. The second holding lamp unit 54 can hold up to four game balls, and corresponds to the variable display of the second result display unit 45b and the symbol display device 51.

The third hold lamp unit 55 is a portion that displays the number of hold of the game balls that have won a prize in each through gate 41, and lights up according to the number of hold. The third holding lamp unit 55 can hold up to four game balls, and corresponds to the variable display of the accessory display unit 46.
The holding lamp units 53 to 55 may have other configurations such as being displayed as an image on a part of the symbol display device 51.

FIG. 4 is a diagram showing a display screen of the symbol display device. Specifically, FIG. 4A is a diagram showing a display screen G of the symbol display device 51 when the variable display of the symbol is executed triggered by winning a prize in the upper operating port 36, and FIG. 4B is shown in FIG. Is a diagram showing a display screen G of a symbol display device 51 when a variable display of a symbol is executed by using a prize in the lower operating port 37 as a trigger.
As shown in FIG. 4, the display screen G of the symbol display device 51 is divided into three rows of display areas, and the left symbol row Z1, the middle symbol row Z2, and the right symbol are in each display area in this order from the left. Column Z3 is displayed. In FIG. 4, the center line of each display area is indicated by a alternate long and short dash line.

When the variable display of the symbol is executed with the winning of the upper operating port 36 as a trigger, each symbol sequence Z1 to Z3 is composed of the numbers "1" to "8" as shown in FIG. 4 (A). Eight kinds of symbols are arranged in ascending order from the bottom to the top, and after "8", "1" is arranged.
When the variable display of the pattern is executed with the winning of the lower operating port 37 as a trigger, each symbol sequence Z1 to Z3 is composed of the letters "A" to "C" as shown in FIG. 4 (B). The three types of symbols are arranged in ascending order from the bottom to the top, and the "C" is followed by the "A".
Therefore, by looking at the display screen G of the symbol display device 51, the player confirms which of the upper actuating port 36 and the lower actuating port 37 is triggered to execute the variable display of the symbol. can do.

The symbol display device 51 periodically scrolls the symbols of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction (upward in the present embodiment) based on the winning of the upper operating port 36 or the lower operating port 37. By starting the variable display of the symbol, the effect for the game round is executed on the display screen G. The effect for this game round is switched from the variable display to the stop display in the order of the left symbol row Z1 → the right symbol row Z3 → the middle symbol row Z2, and finally, the predetermined symbol is stopped and displayed on the effective line L. It ends in the state.
That is, the game times means from the start of the variable display on the main display unit 45 and the symbol display device 51 to the display of a predetermined stop result based on the winning of each of the operating ports 36 and 37.

The mode of variable display of symbols in the symbol display device 51 is not limited to this, and is arbitrary. For example, the number of columns of the symbol string, the scrolling direction of each symbol string, the number of symbols of each symbol string, and the like can be changed as appropriate. Further, the symbol of each symbol string may be a mode in which a picture and a number or an alphabet are combined, or may be a mode of only a picture, instead of the mode of only numbers or letters.

<Electrical configuration of pachinko machine 10>
FIG. 5 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a pachinko machine.
As shown in FIG. 5, the pachinko machine 10 includes a main control device 60, a voice emission control device 90, and a display control device 100, and these devices are mounted on the back side of the inner frame. Further, the pachinko machine 10 includes a payout control device 70 that executes payout control that causes the above-mentioned payout device 71 to pay out the game balls, and a power supply that executes launch control that causes the above-mentioned game ball launch mechanism 81 to launch the game balls. A launch control device 80 is provided, and these devices are mounted on a back pack unit.

The main control device 60 includes a main control board 61 that controls the main control (main control) of the game, and a power failure monitoring board 65 that monitors the power supply. The main control device 60 includes a board box for accommodating the main control board 61 and the like. The substrate box may be provided with a trace means that leaves a trace when the substrate box is opened, or may be provided with a trace structure that leaves a trace when the substrate box is opened. Specifically, as a trace means, a substrate box is formed by connecting a plurality of case bodies, and a connecting portion (caulking portion) that requires destruction of a predetermined portion when separating each case body is provided or peeled off. At this time, it is possible to adopt a configuration in which a sealing sticker that leaves a trace of peeling due to the adhesive layer remaining on the bonding target is attached so as to straddle the boundary between the plurality of case bodies. Further, as the trace structure, a configuration in which an adhesive is applied to the boundary between these case bodies can be adopted.

The main control board 61 includes an MPU 62 mounted on the main control board 61, and a ROM 63 and a RAM 64 constituting the MPU 62. Here, the MPU 62 is an element in which a CPU, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, a counter circuit as a random number generator, and the like are combined into a chip in addition to the ROM 63 and the RAM 64.
In the present embodiment, the ROM 63 and the RAM 64 are integrated into one chip with respect to the MPU 62, but they may be individually chipped. This also applies to MPUs of control devices other than the main control device 60.

The ROM 63 is a memory for storing various control programs and fixed value data, and is a non-volatile storage means that does not require an external power supply for holding the stored information. The ROM 63 has various areas such as a pass / fail table storage area 63a, a distribution table storage area 63b, an electric service pass / fail table storage area 63c, and a reach table storage area 63d.
The RAM 64 is a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when executing a control program stored in the ROM 63, and is a volatile storage means that requires an external power supply for holding the stored information. Is. The RAM 64 has various areas such as various counter areas 64a, a holding ball storage area 64b, an electric service holding area 64c, and various flag storage areas 64d.

The MPU 62 includes an input port and an output port. The input port of the MPU 62 is connected to a power failure monitoring board 65 provided in the main control device 60 and a plurality of detection sensors 50a to 50g. The output port of the MPU 62 is connected to the power failure monitoring board 65, the payout control device 70, and the voice emission control device 90. Further, the output port of the MPU 62 includes an electric accessory drive unit 37b for opening and closing the electric accessory 37a of the lower operating port 37, a variable winning drive unit 38c for opening and closing the opening / closing door 38b of the variable winning device 38, and a blade member. The blade member drive unit 401c that opens and closes the 401a, the plate drive unit 403c that opens and closes the plate 403a, the main display unit 45, and the accessory display unit 46 are connected to each other.

The main control board 61 has a driver circuit. The MPU 62 executes drive control of various drive units and the like through this driver circuit. Specifically, in the electric service open state, the MPU 62 executes drive control of the electric accessory drive unit 37b to open and close the electric accessory drive 37a. Further, in the open / close execution mode, the MPU 62 executes drive control of the variable winning drive unit 38c to open / close the large winning opening 38a. Further, in the variable ball entry execution mode, the MPU 62 executes the drive control of the blade member drive unit 401c to open and close the blade member 401a, and executes the drive control of the plate drive unit 403c to open and close the plate 403a. Further, in each game round, the MPU 62 executes the display control of the main display unit 45 and displays the result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning of the respective operating ports 36 and 37.

The power failure monitoring board 65 relays between the main control board 61 and the power supply / launch control device 80 having a function of supplying operating power, and monitors the voltage of DC stable 24 volts output from the power supply / launch control device 80. .. Therefore, the MPU 62 receives power via the power failure monitoring board 65.
The detection sensors 50a to 50g are used in various winning openings of the general winning opening 35, the upper operating opening 36, the lower operating opening 37, and the variable winning device 38, the out opening 39, the right entry opening 404, and each through gate 41. It is provided in a one-to-one correspondence. Based on the detection results of the detection sensors 50a to 50g, the MPU 62 makes a winning determination (ball entry determination) for various winning openings, an out opening 39, a right entry opening 404, and each through gate 41. The MPU 62 executes an internal lottery based on the winning determination of the upper operating port 36 or the lower operating port 37.

The payout control device 70 executes payout control for causing the payout device 71 to pay out prize balls and rental balls (game balls to be lent to the player during a game) based on a command (control command) transmitted from the main control device 60. To do.

The power supply / launch control device 80 is connected to, for example, a commercial power supply (external power supply) in a playground or the like. Then, the power supply / emission control device 80 generates the operating power required for each of the main control board 61, the payout control device 70, and the like based on the external power supplied from the commercial power source, and the generated operation. Supply power. The power supply / emission control device 80 includes a power supply unit for power failure such as a backup capacitor. The power supply unit for power failure supplies power for storage and holding to the RAM 64 of the main control device 60 even when the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off.

Further, the power supply / launch control device 80 executes launch control for launching the game ball to the game ball launch mechanism 81. Here, the game ball launch mechanism 81 includes a launch rail extending toward the guide rail 34 of the game board 31, a ball feeding device that supplies the game balls stored in the upper plate 25a onto the launch rail, and a launch rail. It is provided with a solenoid, which is an electric actuator that launches the game ball supplied to the guide rail 34 toward the guide rail 34. When the predetermined firing conditions are satisfied, the power supply / firing control device 80 supplies a drive signal (launch permission signal) to the solenoid to launch the game ball.

<Electrical configuration for executing an internal lottery in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60>
FIG. 6 is a diagram showing the contents of each counter used in the internal lottery.
As shown in FIG. 6, the MPU 62 executes an internal lottery or the like by using the values (information) of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4. Specifically, the MPU 62 uses the random number counter C1 in the lottery for hit occurrence, and uses the hit type counter C2 in the lottery for the hit type when the hit occurs, and reaches for the lottery as to whether or not to generate the reach display. The random number counter C3 is used. Further, the MPU 62 uses the random number initial value counter CINI to set the initial value of the hit random number counter C1, and uses the variable type counter CS to determine the display duration in the main display unit 45 and the symbol display device 51. Further, the MPU 62 uses the electric accessory opening counter C4 for a lottery as to whether or not the electric accessory 37a of the lower operating port 37 is set to the electric service open state. The counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 are provided in various counter areas 64a (see FIG. 5) of the RAM 64.

Each of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time the counter is updated, and after reaching the maximum value, the counter returns to 0. Each counter is periodically updated, and the updated value is appropriately stored in a lottery counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 64. Among the values stored in the lottery counter buffer, the values of the hit random number counter C1, the hit type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 are RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball wins the upper operating port 36 or the lower operating port 37. It is stored in the reserved ball storage area 64b (see FIG. 5) provided as the acquisition information storage means.

The holding ball storage area 64b includes a holding area Ra for the first result display unit, a holding area Rb for the second result display unit, and an execution area AE.

The first result display unit holding area Ra provided as the first acquired information storage means includes four storage areas of the first area Ra1 to the fourth area Ra4. Each area Ra1 to Ra4 is set to a storage capacity capable of storing a set of values of the hit random number counter C1, the hit type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3. The MPU 62 uses the set of the values of the hit random number counter C1, the hit type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 as hold information in time series in each area Ra1 to Ra4 according to the winning of the game ball to the upper operating port 36. Store it. Specifically, the MPU 62 holds the hold information in the order of the first area Ra1 → the second area Ra2 → the third area Ra3 → the fourth area Ra4 when the winning of the upper operating port 36 occurs a plurality of times in succession. Store in chronological order.

As described above, since the holding area Ra for the first result display unit includes four storage areas, up to four winning balls for the upper operating port 36 are held. Further, the hold area Ra for the first result display unit includes a storage area for writing the number of holds stored in each of the areas Ra1 to Ra4.
The number of holdings related to the upper operating port 36 is not limited to 4, but may be any other, such as 2, 3, or 5 or more, and may be a single number. You may.

The second result display unit holding area Rb provided as the second acquired information storage means includes four storage areas of the first area Rb1 to the fourth area Rb4. Each area Rb1 to Rb4 is set to a storage capacity capable of storing a set of values of the hit random number counter C1, the hit type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3. The MPU 62 uses the set of the values of the hit random number counter C1, the hit type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 as hold information in time series in each area Rb1 to Rb4 according to the winning of the game ball to the lower operating port 37. Store it. Specifically, the MPU 62 holds the hold information in the order of the first area Rb1 → the second area Rb2 → the third area Rb3 → the fourth area Rb4 when the lower operating port 37 is awarded a prize a plurality of times in succession. Store in chronological order.

As described above, since the holding area Rb for the second result display unit includes four storage areas, up to four winning balls for the lower operating port 37 are held. Further, the hold area Rb for the second result display unit includes a storage area for writing the number of holds stored in each of the areas Rb1 to Rb4.
The number of holdings related to the lower operating port 37 is not limited to 4, but may be arbitrary, may be 2, 3, or 5 or more, and may be a single number. You may.

When the execution area AE starts the variable display of the result display units 45a and 45b, the execution area AE stores the hold information stored in the storage area of the hold area Ra for the first result display unit or the hold area Rb for the second result display unit. It is an area for moving.

<Detailed explanation of each counter>
The details of each counter will be described below.
First, the electric accessory opening counter C4 will be described. The electric accessory release counter C4 becomes a loop counter that loops in the range of 0 to 250 by adding 1 to the previous value each time it is updated, reaching the maximum value of 250, and then returning to 0. ing.
The electric accessory opening counter C4 is periodically updated, and the updated value is stored in the lottery counter buffer at the timing when the game ball wins a prize in each through gate 41.
Then, the MPU 62 draws a lottery (electric accessory) as to whether or not the electric accessory 37a of the lower operating port 37 is set to the electric accessory open state based on the value of the electric accessory opening counter C4 stored in the lottery counter buffer. Open lottery) is executed.

Here, the pachinko machine 10 has a plurality of support modes in which the frequency of winning a game ball into the lower operating port 37 is different from each other by setting the electric accessory 37a to the open state. Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 has a low frequency support mode (low frequency guide state) in which the frequency of setting the electric accessory 37a to the open state is relatively low, and a frequency of setting the electric accessory 37a to the open state. It has a relatively high frequency support mode (high frequency guide state).

FIG. 7 is a diagram showing an electric service winning / failing table in which the values of random numbers that win the electric service opening occurrence are stored.
Among the values of the electric accessory release counter C4, the value of the random number that wins the electric combination release occurrence is, as shown in FIG. 7, the electric service winning / failing table storage area 63c of the ROM 63 provided as the electric service winning / failing information group storage means. (See FIG. 5) is stored as an electric service winning / failing table (electrical service winning / failing information group).

Further, the electric service winning / failing table includes the electric service winning / failing table for the low frequency support mode (low frequency electric service winning / failing information group) shown in FIG. 7A and the high frequency support mode shown in FIG. 7B. It is equipped with an electric service winning / failing table (high-frequency electric service winning / failing information group).
The MPU 62 executes a lottery for the occurrence of electric service opening by comparing these electric service winning / failing tables with the values of the electric accessory release counter C4 stored in the lottery counter buffer.

These electric service winning / failing tables have the results of a lottery (electric service winning / failing result) of a plurality of electric service opening occurrences of "electric service opening winning" and "missing result".
Here, the "electric service open winning" is the result of whether or not the electric service is successful, in which the electric accessory 37a of the lower operating port 37 is in the electric service open state.

Specifically, in a gaming state in which the electric service winning / failing table for the low frequency support mode is referred to in the lottery for the occurrence of electric service opening, as shown in FIG. 7A, "electric service opening winning" is used. The value of the random number is one. In other words, in the low-frequency support mode, the electric accessory opening lottery has a probability of winning the electric role opening occurrence with a probability of 1/251.
In addition, in the low-frequency support mode, other than the value of the random number that is the "electrical service release winning", the electric service opening is not won and the result is "missing result".

On the other hand, in a game state in which the electric service winning / failing table for the high frequency support mode is referred to in the lottery for the occurrence of electric service opening, as shown in FIG. The value of is one.
In addition, in the high-frequency support mode, except for the value of the random number that becomes the "outlier result", the electric service release occurrence is won and the "electric service release result" is obtained. In other words, in the high-frequency support mode, the electric accessory opening lottery has a probability of winning the electric role opening occurrence with a probability of about 250/251.
The value and number of random numbers stored in each electric service winning / failing table are arbitrary, and if the high-frequency support mode has a higher probability of being "electrical service open winning" than the low-frequency support mode. Good.

Therefore, in the high-frequency support mode, the game ball is more likely to win a prize in the lower operating port 37 as compared with the low-frequency support mode. In other words, in the low frequency support mode, the game ball has a higher probability of winning the upper operating port 36 than the lower operating opening 37. Further, in the high frequency support mode, the game ball has a higher probability of winning the lower operating port 37 than the upper operating port 36.
Then, when a prize is detected in the lower operating port 37, a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out. Therefore, in the high frequency support mode, the player plays a game while not reducing the number of game balls so much. It can be carried out.

The configuration of the low frequency support mode and the high frequency support mode is not limited to this. For example, the high-frequency support mode may be configured so that the number of times the electric accessory 37a is set to the open state when the electric service opening occurrence is won is larger than that in the low-frequency support mode. Further, for example, the high-frequency support mode is configured so that when the electric service opening occurrence is won, the one-time opening time for setting the electric accessory 37a to the open state is longer than that of the low-frequency support mode. You may. Further, for example, in the high frequency support mode, the closing time for setting the electric accessory 37a in the closed state during each opening in the one electric service open state is shortened as compared with the low frequency support mode. It may be configured. Further, for example, in the high-frequency support mode, the minimum secured time (1 in the accessory display unit 46) is secured as the waiting time from the end of the electric accessory opening lottery to the next electric accessory opening lottery. The duration of the variable display of times) may be configured to be shorter than that of the low frequency support mode. Further, for example, a plurality of types of securing times may be prepared, and the high-frequency support mode may be configured so that a short securing time can be easily selected as compared with the low-frequency support mode. It may be configured to be shorter than the low frequency support mode. Further, by combining the conditions of the number of times the electric accessory 37a is set to the open state, the opening time, and the securing time, the high frequency support mode sets the frequency of setting the electric accessory 37a to the open state to the low frequency support mode. It may be configured to be relatively high as compared with.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the low frequency support mode functions as a first gaming state in which the probability of entering the upper operating port 36 is higher than that of the lower operating port 37. In addition, the high-frequency support mode has a higher probability of entering the lower operating port 37 than the upper operating port 36, so that the high-frequency support mode is a second gaming state in which the player is more advantageous than the low-frequency support mode. Function.

Next, the hit random number counter C1 will be described. The hit random number counter C1 is, for example, a loop counter that loops within the range of 0 to 599 by adding 1 to the previous value each time it is updated, reaching the maximum value of 599, and then returning to 0. .. Further, the hit random number counter C1 reads the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time as an initial value every time it loops once. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter that loops within the range of 0 to 599, similarly to the hit random number counter C1.

The winning random number counter C1 is periodically updated, and the updated value is set in the reserved ball storage area 64b of the RAM 64 via the lottery counter buffer at the timing when the game ball wins in the upper operating port 36 or the lower operating port 37. Stored in. Specifically, the value of the winning random number counter C1 is stored in the holding area Ra for the first result display unit of the RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball wins in the upper operating port 36, and the game ball wins in the lower operating port 37. It is stored in the holding area Rb for the second result display unit of the RAM 64 at the timing.
Then, the MPU 62 executes a winning lottery (win / fail lottery) based on the value of the hit random number counter C1 stored in the reserved ball storage area 64b.

FIG. 8 is a diagram showing a winning / failing table in which the values of random numbers that win the hit occurrence are stored.
Among the values of the hit random number counter C1, the value of the random number that wins the hit occurrence is a hit / miss table in the hit / miss table storage area 63a (see FIG. 5) of the ROM 63 provided as the hit / miss information group storage means, as shown in FIG. It is stored as (win / fail information group).

The pass / fail table includes a first pass / fail table (first pass / fail information group) shown in FIG. 8 (a) and a second pass / fail table (second pass / fail information group) shown in FIG. 8 (b).
The MPU 62 executes a lottery for hit occurrence (big hit occurrence or small hit occurrence) by comparing these hit / fail tables with the value of the hit random number counter C1 stored in the reserved ball storage area 64b.

The first hit / fail table is a big hit against the value of the hit random number counter C1 shifted from the hold area Ra for the first result display unit to the execution area AE, that is, the value of the hit random number counter C1 based on the winning of the upper operating port 36. It is a table that is referred to when a lottery of occurrence is performed. In this first winning / failing table, as shown in FIG. 8A, there are two random numbers, "7" and "77", for which the "big hit win" is obtained.
In addition, the value of the random number that becomes the "small hit winning" is 100 of "100 to 199". In other words, as a result of the internal lottery conducted based on the winning of the upper operating port 36, the probability of winning a small hit is 1/6.
Furthermore, except for the values of random numbers that are "big hit winning" and "small hit winning", the big hit is not won and the result is "normal loss result".

The second hit / fail table is smaller than the value of the hit random number counter C1 shifted from the hold area Rb for the second result display unit to the execution area AE, that is, the value of the hit random number counter C1 based on the winning of the lower operating port 37. This is a table that is referred to when a lottery for winning is performed. In this second winning / failing table, as shown in FIG. 8B, the value of the random numbers for which the “small hit win” is obtained is 480 of “0 to 479”. In other words, as a result of the internal lottery conducted based on the winning of the lower operating port 37, the probability of winning a small hit is 4/5.
Here, the values of the random numbers for "big hit winning" and "small hit winning" stored in the first winning / failing table are included in the values of the random numbers for "small hit winning" stored in the second winning / failing table. There is.

In addition, other than the value of the random number that is the "small hit winning", the small hit is not won and the result is "normal loss result".
The value and number of random numbers stored in each pass / fail table are arbitrary. In addition, the value of the random number that becomes the "small hit winning" stored in the second winning / failing table does not include the value of the random number that becomes the "big hit winning" and the "small hit winning" stored in the first winning / failing table. It may include a part of the random numbers which become "big hit winning" and "small hit winning" stored in the first winning or failing table.

Here, the "big hit win" is the result of winning or failing to shift to the open / close execution mode.
Further, the "small hit winning" is a winning / failing result of shifting to the variable ball entry execution mode. Then, in this variable ball entry execution mode, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the open / close execution mode when a ball enters the right ball entry port 404.
In the following description, the transition to the open / close execution mode due to the occurrence of a ball entering the right entry port 404 is also referred to as a jackpot occurrence.

Here, as a result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning of the upper operating port 36, the probability of winning a "small hit" is 1/6, and as described above, the opening period of the plate 403a is the blade member. Since it is about 1/10 of the opening period of 401a, the probability of winning the jackpot occurrence is about 1/60 by shifting to the variable ball entry execution mode triggered by winning the upper operating port 36.
Further, as a result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning of the lower operating port 37, the probability of winning a "small hit" is 4/5, and as described above, the opening period of the plate 403a is the blade member 401a. Since it is about 1/10 of the opening period of the above, the probability of winning the jackpot occurrence is about 1 / 12.5 by shifting to the variable ball entry execution mode triggered by winning the lower operating port 37.

Next, the hit type counter C2 will be described. The hit type counter C2 is, for example, a loop counter that loops within the range of 0 to 29 by adding 1 to the previous value each time it is updated, reaching the maximum value of 29, and then returning to 0. ..
The hit type counter C2 is periodically updated, and the updated value is set in the reserved ball storage area 64b of the RAM 64 via the lottery counter buffer at the timing when the game ball wins in the upper operating port 36 or the lower operating port 37. Stored in. Specifically, the value of the hit type counter C2 is stored in the holding area Ra for the first result display unit of the RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball wins in the upper operating port 36, and the game ball wins in the lower operating port 37. It is stored in the holding area Rb for the second result display unit of the RAM 64 at the timing.
Then, the MPU 62 executes a lottery (sorting lottery) of the hit type when a hit occurs, based on the value of the hit type counter C2 stored in the reserved ball storage area 64b.

FIG. 9 is a diagram showing a distribution table in which the values of random numbers related to the distribution destinations of the winning types are stored.
As shown in FIG. 9, the value of the random number related to the distribution destination of the winning type is a distribution table (distribution) in the distribution table storage area 63b (see FIG. 5) of the ROM 63 provided as the distribution information group storage means. It is stored as a minute information group). The distribution table includes a first distribution table (first distribution information group) shown in FIG. 9 (a) and a second distribution table (second distribution information group) shown in FIG. 9 (b). ing.
The MPU 62 executes a winning type lottery by comparing these distribution tables with the value of the winning type counter C2 stored in the reserved ball storage area 64b.

The first distribution table is based on the value of the hit type counter C2 shifted from the hold area Ra for the first result display unit to the execution area AE, that is, the value of the hit type counter C2 based on the winning of the upper operating port 36. This is a table that is referred to when a lottery of the winning type is performed.
As shown in FIG. 9A, the first distribution table includes "low frequency support mode results (distribution results corresponding to low frequency support mode)" and "high frequency support mode results (distribution corresponding to high frequency support mode)". Multiple distribution results of "minute results)" are used as distribution destinations. Specifically, in the first distribution table, among the values "0 to 29" of the hit type counter C2, "0 to 14" are distributed to "low frequency support mode results", and "15 to 29" are "high". It is distributed to "Frequency support mode result".
Therefore, as a result of the internal lottery conducted based on the winning of the upper operating port 36, the probability of becoming a "low frequency support mode result" is 50%, and the probability of becoming a "high frequency support mode result" is also 50%. is there.

The second distribution table is based on the value of the hit type counter C2 shifted from the hold area Rb for the second result display unit to the execution area AE, that is, the value of the hit type counter C2 based on the winning of the lower operating port 37. This is a table that is referred to when a lottery of the winning type is performed.
As shown in FIG. 9B, the second distribution table includes "low frequency support mode results (distribution results corresponding to low frequency support mode)" and "high frequency support mode results (distribution corresponding to high frequency support mode)". Multiple distribution results of "minute results)" are used as distribution destinations. Specifically, in the second distribution table, among the values "0 to 29" of the hit type counter C2, "0 to 9" are distributed to "low frequency support mode results", and "10 to 29" are "high". It is distributed to "Frequency support mode result".
Therefore, as a result of the internal lottery conducted based on the winning of the lower operating port 37, the probability of becoming a "low frequency support mode result" is about 33%, and the probability of becoming a "high frequency support mode result" is about 67. %.

The "low frequency support mode result" is a distribution result in which the support mode is set to the low frequency support mode after the opening / closing execution mode ends, except when a predetermined condition is satisfied. This low frequency support mode continues until a jackpot occurs.
The "high-frequency support mode result" is a distribution result in which the support mode is set to the high-frequency support mode after the open / close execution mode ends. This high-frequency support mode shifts to the low-frequency support mode when the number of game rounds reaches the end reference number of times (specifically, 100 times).

Next, the reach random number counter C3 will be described. The reach random number counter C3 is, for example, a loop counter that loops within the range of 0 to 238 by adding 1 to the previous value each time it is updated, reaching the maximum value of 238, and then returning to 0. ..
The reach random number counter C3 is periodically updated, and the updated value is set in the reserved ball storage area 64b of the RAM 64 via the lottery counter buffer at the timing when the game ball wins in the upper operating port 36 or the lower operating port 37. Stored in. Specifically, the value of the reach random number counter C3 is stored in the holding area Ra for the first result display unit of the RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball wins in the upper operating port 36, and the game ball wins in the lower operating port 37. It is stored in the holding area Rb for the second result display unit of the RAM 64 at the timing.
Then, the MPU 62 executes a lottery (reach generation lottery) as to whether or not to generate the reach display based on the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the reserved ball storage area 64b.

The reach display is an expected effect that occurs when the result is a "normal loss result" without being a "big hit win" or a "small hit win" in the winning / failing lottery.
Specifically, the MPU 62 is stored in the reach table and the reserved ball storage area 64b when the result is a "normal loss result" without being a "big hit win" or a "small hit win" in the winning / losing lottery. By comparing with the value of the reach random number counter C3, a lottery for whether or not to generate the reach display is executed, and when the reach display is generated in this lottery, the reach display is generated. The reach table is a table that stores the value of a random number related to the occurrence of the reach display, and is stored in the reach table storage area 63d (see FIG. 5) of the ROM 63.

Here, when the winning / failing lottery results in a "big hit winning" and the distribution lottery is assigned to the "high frequency support mode result", the symbol display device 51 has the same odd number as the stop result. The combination of symbols is stopped and displayed on the effective line L. In addition, when the result is a "big hit" in the winning / losing lottery and the result is sorted into the "low frequency support mode result" in the sorting lottery, the symbol display device 51 has the same even number as the stop result. The combination of is stopped and displayed on the effective line L. Further, in the case of "small hit winning" in the winning / failing lottery performed based on the winning of the upper operating port 36, the symbol display device 51 is not a combination of symbols having the same number as a stop result. , A combination of special symbols having different numbers that are not selected when the result is "normally out of order" in the winning / failing lottery is stopped and displayed on the effective line L. In the case of a "small hit winning" in the winning / failing lottery performed based on the winning of the lower operating port 37, the symbol display device 51 activates a combination of symbols having the same alphabet as a stop result. Stop display above.

The reach display is performed when the combination of symbols having the same number or the same alphabet is finally stopped and displayed (when a "big hit" is won in the winning / losing lottery, or based on winning a prize in the lower operating port 37. In the case of "small hit winning" in the winning / losing lottery), it occurs regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3. In addition, the reach display is a reach when the combination of special symbols is finally stopped and displayed (when a "small hit win" is obtained in the winning or losing lottery performed based on the winning of the upper operating port 36). It does not occur regardless of the value of the random number counter C3.

In the reach display mode, a part of the symbol rows (for example, the symbol row Z1 and the symbol row Z3) among the plurality of symbol rows Z1 to Z3 displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 51 is placed on the effective line L. By displaying the stop, the same combination of symbols is displayed to suggest the stop result, and the remaining symbol sequence (for example, symbol sequence Z2) is displayed in a variable manner in that state.
Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 generates a "big hit" or "small hit" in the winning / losing lottery after the variable display is started on the symbol display device 51 by generating the reach display and before displaying the predetermined stop result. It is possible to make the player expect that the player has won the prize.

The reach display mode is not limited to this, and after stopping and displaying a part of the symbol strings, the remaining symbol strings are displayed in a variable manner, and a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a moving image in the background. Alternatively, each symbol string may be reduced or hidden, and then a predetermined character or the like may be displayed as a moving image on substantially the entire display screen G.

Here, the pachinko machine 10 has an expected effect as a kind of variable display of the symbol display device 51. The expected effect is that after the variable display is started on the symbol display device 51 and before the predetermined stop result is displayed, the game may have become a "big win" or a "small win" in the winning / losing lottery. A production that makes people expect. Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 has two types of expected effects, the reach display and the notice display described above.

The notice display is from the case where "big hit winning" or "small hit winning" is obtained in the winning / losing lottery, and the result is "normal loss result" without being "big hit winning" or "small hit winning" in the winning / losing lottery. Is also an expected production that makes it easier to generate production. This notice display may make it easier to select an effect having a low appearance rate, or may combine these, instead of making it easier to generate the effect.
The lottery for whether or not to generate the reach display was executed by the main control device 60, whereas the lottery for whether or not to generate the notice display is executed by the voice emission control device 90. ..

As for the mode of the notice display, among the plurality of symbol rows Z1 to Z3 displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 51, all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are variablely displayed, and some of the symbol rows (for example, In a situation where the symbol sequence Z1) is stopped and displayed on the effective line L and a plurality of symbol sequences (for example, the symbol columns Z2 and Z3) are displayed in a variable manner or a reach display is generated, a predetermined character is displayed. Etc. are displayed on the display screen G as a moving image. This notice display occurs in both the case where the reach display is generated and the case where the reach display is not generated, but it is set so that it is more likely to occur when the reach display is generated than when the reach display is not generated. Has been done.
The notice display is not limited to this, and for example, the background may be changed and the notice display may be displayed by changing the form of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3.

Finally, the variable type counter CS will be described. The variation type counter CS is, for example, a loop counter that loops within the range of 0 to 198 by adding 1 to the previous value each time it is updated, reaching the maximum value of 198, and then returning to 0. ..
The variation type counter CS is updated at least once for each execution of the normal processing described later, and is stored in the lottery counter buffer each time the update is performed.
Then, the MPU 62 determines the display duration of the symbol on the main display unit 45 and the display duration of the symbol on the symbol display device 51 based on the value of the variation type counter CS stored in the lottery counter buffer.

<About various processes executed by the main controller 60>
The MPU 62 of the main control device 60 executes timer interrupt processing and normal processing for advancing the game, and main processing that is activated when the power is turned on. Hereinafter, timer interrupt processing, normal processing, and main processing will be described in order.
The MPU 62 executes timer interrupt processing, normal processing, and main processing, as well as NMI interrupt processing that is activated by inputting a power failure signal to the NMI terminal (non-maskable terminal), but the description of this processing will be omitted.

<Timer interrupt processing>
FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a flowchart of timer interrupt processing.
In the timer interrupt process, the MPU 62 periodically (for example, at a cycle of 2 msec) executes steps S101 to S105, as shown in FIG.

In step S101, the MPU 62 executes a reading process for the plurality of detection sensors 50a to 50g. In this reading process, the MPU 62 reads the states of the plurality of detection sensors 50a to 50g, determines the states, and stores them in the RAM 64 as winning detection information. When the MPU 62 determines that the detection sensors 50a to 50d corresponding to the various winning openings have detected the winning of the game ball, the MPU 62 sets a prize ball command for instructing the payout of the prize ball, and this setting is made. The command is transmitted to the payout control device 70. For example, when the MPU 62 determines that the detection sensor 50d corresponding to the variable winning device 38 has detected the winning of a game ball, the MPU 62 is a prize ball command for instructing 15 prize balls, which is a specific unit number. Is transmitted to the payout control device 70.
The payout control device 70 performs payout control for causing the payout device 71 to pay out the prize balls based on the prize ball command transmitted from the MPU 62.

In step S102, the MPU 62 updates the random number initial value counter CINI. Specifically, as described above, the MPU 62 updates the random number initial value counter CINI by adding 1 to the previous value, and stores the updated value in the lottery counter buffer set in the predetermined area of the RAM 64. To do. If the MPU 62 reaches the maximum value when 1 is added to the previous value of the random number initial value counter CINI, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI is returned to 0 and cleared.

In step S103, the MPU 62 updates the hit random number counter C1, the hit type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric accessory release counter C4. Specifically, as described above, the MPU 62 is updated by adding 1 to the previous values of the hit random number counter C1, the hit type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric accessory release counter C4, respectively. The latter value is stored in the lottery counter buffer set in the predetermined area of the RAM 64. If the MPU 62 reaches the maximum value when 1 is added to the previous values of the counters C1 to C4, the values of the counters C1 to C4 are returned to 0 and cleared.

In step S104, the MPU 62 executes a winning process for thru. In this through winning process, when the MPU 62 determines that the detection sensor 50f corresponding to each through gate 41 has detected the winning of the game ball, the electric accessory opening counter C4 updated in step S103. The value of is stored in the electric service holding area 64c. Further, the MPU 62 sets a command for lighting the third hold lamp unit 55, and transmits the set command to the voice emission control device 90.
The voice emission control device 90 turns on the third hold lamp unit 55 based on the command transmitted from the MPU 62. Further, as described above, the maximum number of reserved game balls that have won the through gate 41 is four, and the third reserved lamp unit 55 lights up by the number corresponding to the reserved number.

In step S105, the MPU 62 executes a winning process for the operating port. After that, the MPU 62 ends the timer interrupt processing.
Hereinafter, the winning process for the operating port will be described in detail.

<Prize processing for operating port>
FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a flowchart of a winning process for the operating port.
In the winning process for the actuation port, the MPU 62 executes steps S201 to S207 as shown in FIG.

In step S201, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the detection sensor 50b corresponding to the upper operating port 36 has detected the winning of the game ball, thereby determining whether or not the game ball has won the upper operating opening 36 (starting winning). Is determined. When the MPU 62 determines in step S201 that the game ball has won a prize in the upper operating port 36, in step S202, the MPU 62 grasps the number of holdings stored in the holding area Ra for the first result display unit, and holds the holding. The number is set as the first start hold storage number RaN in a predetermined storage area in the hold area Ra for the first result display unit. After that, the MPU 62 executes the processes after step S205.

On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S201 that the game ball has not won the upper operating port 36, in step S203, the detection sensor 50c corresponding to the lower operating port 37 wins the game ball. By determining whether or not is detected, it is determined whether or not the game ball has won a prize (starting prize) in the lower operating port 37.
When it is determined in step S203 that the game ball has not won a prize in the lower operating port 37, the MPU 62 ends the winning process for the operating port. Further, when the MPU 62 determines in step S203 that the game ball has won a prize in the lower operating port 37, in step S204, the MPU 62 grasps the number of holdings stored in the holding area Rb for the second result display unit. The reserved number is set as the second start reserved storage number RbN in a predetermined storage area in the reserved area Rb for the second result display unit. After that, the MPU 62 executes the processes after step S205.

After executing the process of step S202 or step S204, in step S205, the start hold storage number N (RaN or RbN) set in step S202 or step S204 is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment). Determine if it exists.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S205 that the start hold storage number N is not less than the upper limit value, the MPU 62 ends the winning process for the operating port. Further, when the MPU 62 determines in step S205 that the start hold storage number N is less than the upper limit value, the MPU 62 updates by adding 1 to the value of the start hold storage number N in step S206.

In step S207, the MPU 62 sets each value set of the hit random number counter C1, the hit type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 updated in step S103 of the timer interrupt process in the free storage area of the hold area for the result display unit. It is stored as hold information in the first storage area, that is, the storage area corresponding to the start hold storage number N updated in step S206.

For example, when the first start hold storage number RaN is set in step S202, the MPU 62 has each of the hit random number counter C1, the hit type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 updated in step S103 of the timer interrupt process. The set of values is stored as hold information in the first storage area of the free storage area of the hold area Ra for the first result display unit, that is, the storage area corresponding to the first start hold storage number RaN updated in step S206. For example, when the first start hold storage number RaN is set to "3" in step S202, the MPU 62 is in the storage area corresponding to "4" of the first start hold storage number RaN updated in step S206. Hold information is stored in a certain fourth area Ra4.

Further, for example, when the second start hold storage number RbN is set in step S204, the MPU 62 has a hit random number counter C1, a hit type counter C2, and a reach random number counter C3 updated in step S103 of the timer interrupt process. The set of each value of is stored as hold information in the first storage area of the free storage area of the hold area Rb for the second result display unit, that is, the storage area corresponding to the second start hold storage number RbN updated in step S206. To do. For example, when the second start hold storage number RbN is set to "3" in step S204, the MPU 62 is in the storage area corresponding to "4" of the second start hold storage number RbN updated in step S206. Hold information is stored in a certain fourth area Rb4.

Further, in step S207, the MPU 62 sets a command for lighting the first hold lamp unit 53 or the second hold lamp unit 54, and transmits this set command to the voice emission control device 90. After that, the MPU 62 ends the winning process for the operating port.
The voice emission control device 90 turns on the first hold lamp unit 53 or the second hold lamp unit 54 based on the command transmitted from the MPU 62. Further, as described above, the maximum number of game balls that have won a prize in the upper operating port 36 or the lower operating port 37 is four, and the first holding lamp unit 53 or the second holding lamp unit 54 is the holding number. And the corresponding number of lights.

<Normal processing>
FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a flowchart of normal processing.
The MPU 62 executes a main process, which will be described later, which is activated when the power is turned on, and then executes a normal process, which is a main process for advancing the game. In this normal process, the MPU 62 executes steps S301 to S314 as shown in FIG. Specifically, the MPU 62 periodically executes steps S301 to S309 at a cycle of 4 msec, repeatedly executes steps S308 to S311 when the remaining time occurs, and steps S312 and subsequent steps according to the determination result of step S308. Execute.

In step S301, the MPU 62 executes an external output process for transmitting the timer interrupt process or the command set in the previous normal process to each control device on the sub side. In this external output processing, for example, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the prize ball command is set, and if it determines that the prize ball command is set, the MPU 62 issues the prize ball command to the payout control device 70. Send. Further, for example, in the MPU 62, whether or not a command for the effect such as a command corresponding to the effect for the game round, an effect for the variable input ball execution mode, and a command corresponding to the effect for the open / close execution mode is set. If it is determined that a command for effect is set, the command for effect is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90.

In step S302, the MPU 62 updates the variation type counter CS. Specifically, as described above, the MPU 62 updates the variable type counter CS by adding 1 to the previous value, and stores the updated value in the lottery counter buffer set in the predetermined area of the RAM 64. .. If the MPU 62 reaches the maximum value when 1 is added to the previous value of the variation type counter CS, the value of the variation type counter CS is returned to 0 to clear the value.

In step S303, the MPU 62 executes a game turn control process for advancing the game turn. In the game time control process, the MPU 62 executes a winning / failing lottery and a sorting lottery, determines information related to a pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the symbol display device 51, and finally stops and displays the pattern on the main display unit 45. Execute the determination of information related to.
In step S304, the MPU 62 executes a game state transition process for shifting the game state. In the game state transition process, the MPU 62 executes a transition process to each game state such as an open / close execution mode, a variable ball entry execution mode, a low frequency support mode, and a high frequency support mode.
The game turn control process in step S303 and the game state transition process in step S304 will be described in detail later.

In step S305, the MPU 62 executes the demo display execution determination process. In this demo display execution determination process, the MPU 62 determines whether or not a predetermined start waiting period for the start of the demo (for example, 3 sec) has elapsed without starting a new game after the end of the game. If it is determined that the start waiting period has elapsed, a demo command for starting the demo display is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90.
The voice emission control device 90 starts the demo display execution process based on the demo command transmitted from the MPU 62.

Here, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the start waiting period has elapsed by counting the number of times the process of step S305 is executed. For example, when the start waiting period is 3 sec and the interval for repeatedly executing the process of step S305 is 4 msec, the MPU 62 counts the number of times the process of step S305 is executed and reaches 750 times, the start waiting period. Is determined to have passed. The configuration for measuring the start waiting period is arbitrary, and for example, the start waiting period may be measured using a real-time clock. Further, if the MPU 62 starts a new game round while counting the number of times the process of step S305 is executed, the MPU 62 resets the value of the count.

In step S306, the MPU 62 executes an electric service support process for executing drive control of the electric accessory 37a provided in the lower operating port 37. In this electric function support process, the MPU 62 executes the electric accessory release lottery based on the value of the electric accessory release counter C4 stored in the lottery counter buffer of the RAM 64. Further, the MPU 62 executes the display control of the accessory display unit 46 so as to display the result of the electric accessory opening lottery.

In step S307, the MPU 62 executes the game ball launch control process. In this game ball launch control process, the MPU 62 causes the power supply / launch control device 80 to execute launch control for launching the game ball based on the player rotating the launch handle 27. Specifically, the power supply / launch control device 80 causes the game ball launch mechanism 81 to launch the game ball by exciting the solenoid of the game ball launch mechanism 81 in a predetermined cycle (0.6 sec in the present embodiment). .. The solenoid is excited to launch the game ball with a firing intensity corresponding to the amount of rotation of the firing handle 27. Further, the power supply / launch control device 80 supplies a drive signal to the solenoid of the game ball launch mechanism 81 to launch the game ball when the predetermined launch conditions are satisfied.

In step S308, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the power failure flag is set in the power failure flag storage area (not shown) of the RAM 64. This power failure flag is set in the RAM 64 by inputting a power failure signal from the power failure monitoring board 65 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 62. When the power failure monitoring board 65 confirms the occurrence of a power failure, the power failure monitoring board 65 outputs this power failure signal. The power failure flag is cleared when the next main process is executed.

Here, the pachinko machine 10 sets various flags by substituting 1 into a predetermined area such as the RAM 64, and clears various flags by substituting 0. For example, the pachinko machine 10 sets the power failure flag by substituting 1 for the power failure flag storage area of the RAM 64, and clears the power failure flag by substituting 0 for the power failure flag storage area of the RAM 64.

When the MPU 62 determines that the power failure flag is set in step S308, the MPU 62 executes the power failure processing after step S312 without executing the processing after step S309. Specifically, in step S312, the MPU 62 prohibits the occurrence of timer interrupt processing. In step S313, the MPU 62 calculates and stores the RAM determination value (checksum of the RAM 64). In step S314, the MPU 62 prohibits access to the RAM 64. After that, the MPU 62 continues an infinite loop until the power supply is completely cut off and the process cannot be executed.

On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S308 that the power failure flag is not set, whether or not the timing for executing the next normal process is reached in step S309, that is, the current normal process is performed. It is determined whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in the present embodiment) has elapsed from the start.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S309 that the timing for executing the next normal processing has not been reached, that is, when the remaining time occurs, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated in step S310, and step S311 In, the variation type counter CS is updated. The MPU 62 repeatedly executes steps S308 to S311 until it is determined in step S309 that the timing for executing the next normal process has been reached.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step S309 that the timing for executing the next normal process has been reached, that is, when the remaining time has not occurred, the MPU 62 executes step S301 again to perform the next time. Start normal processing.

<Main processing>
FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the main process.
In the main process, the MPU 62 executes steps S401 to S412 as shown in FIG.
In step S401, the MPU 62 executes a start-up process when the power is turned on. In this start-up process, the MPU 62 waits for the control board on the sub side (control board of the voice emission control device 90, etc.) to become operable for a predetermined time (for example, about 500 msec) after the power is turned on. ) Elapses.

In step S402, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the permission prohibition period of 1 sec has elapsed. When the MPU 62 determines in step S402 that 1 sec has not elapsed, the MPU 62 repeatedly executes the process of step S402. Further, when it is determined in step S402 that 1 sec has elapsed, the MPU 62 executes the processes after step S403.

Here, the MPU 62 determines whether or not 1 sec has elapsed by counting the number of times the process of step S402 is executed. For example, when the interval for repeatedly executing the process of step S402 is 0.1 msec, the MPU 62 counts the number of times the process of step S402 is executed and determines that 1 sec has elapsed when it reaches 10,000 times. The configuration for measuring the permission / prohibition period is arbitrary, and for example, the permission / prohibition period may be measured using a real-time clock.

In step S403, the MPU 62 permits access to the RAM 64.
In step S404, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the RAM erase switch (not shown) provided in the power supply / emission control device 80 is turned on.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S404 that the RAM erase switch is turned on, the MPU 62 executes the processes after step S409.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S404 that the RAM erase switch is not turned on, the MPU 62 determines in step S405 whether or not the power failure flag is set in the power failure flag storage area of the RAM 64. To do.

Then, when the MPU 62 determines in step S405 that the power failure flag is not set, the MPU 62 executes the processes after step S409.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step S405 that the power failure flag is set, the MPU 62 calculates the RAM determination value in step S406.
In step S407, the MPU 62 confirms the validity of the data stored in the RAM 64 by determining whether or not the RAM determination value calculated in step S406 is normal. Specifically, the MPU 62 compares the RAM determination value calculated in step S406 with the RAM determination value saved in step S313 (processing at the time of power interruption) of normal processing, and if they match, the RAM determination value is compared. , The RAM determination value is determined to be normal, and if they do not match, the RAM determination value is determined to be abnormal.

Then, when the MPU 62 determines in step S407 that the RAM determination value is not normal, the MPU 62 executes the processes after step S409.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S407 that the RAM determination value is normal, the MPU 62 clears the power failure flag stored in the power failure flag storage area of the RAM 64 in step S408.

The validity of the data stored in the RAM 64 may be determined by a method different from the method of confirming the consistency of the RAM determination value. For example, a keyword is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 64 in the power failure processing. The validity of the data stored in the RAM 64 may be confirmed by writing and determining whether or not this keyword is normally written in the main process.

As described above, the MPU 62 determines that the RAM erase switch is turned on in step S404, determines that the power failure flag is not set in step S405, or the RAM determination value in step S407. If it is determined that is not normal, the processes after step S409 are executed.
Specifically, the MPU 62 clears the work area of the RAM 64 in step S409, and initializes the RAM 64 in step S410.

Therefore, for example, the manager of the game hall can initialize the data stored in the RAM 64 by turning on the power of the pachinko machine 10 while pressing the RAM erase switch at the start of business of the game hall. Further, the pachinko machine 10 initializes the data stored in the RAM 64 when the occurrence of the power failure is not confirmed on the power failure monitoring board 65 or when the RAM determination value is abnormal.

After executing the process of step S408 or step S410, the MPU 62 transmits an initial command to the control board on the sub side (control board of the voice emission control device 90, etc.) in step S411, and interrupts the timer in step S412. Allows the occurrence of processing and shifts to the above-mentioned normal processing.
By receiving the initial command transmitted in step S411, the control board on the sub side recognizes that communication with the main control board 61 is normally performed, and executes its own initialization. To do.

<Game times control processing>
FIG. 14 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the game time control process.
In the game times control process, the MPU 62 executes steps S501 to S509 as shown in FIG.
In step S501, the MPU 62 determines whether or not it is in the open / close execution mode. When the MPU 62 determines in step S501 that the open / close execution mode is in progress, the MPU 62 ends the game times control process without executing the processes after step S502. Therefore, when it is determined that the opening / closing execution mode is in progress, the MPU 62 does not start the progress of the game round regardless of whether or not the winning of the game ball to each of the operating ports 36 and 37 is detected.
The MPU 62 determines whether or not it is in the open / close execution mode by referring to the open / close execution mode flag stored in the RAM 64. The same applies to each of the following processes. The MPU 62 sets the open / close execution mode flag at the time of transition to the open / close execution mode, and clears the open / close execution mode flag at the end of the open / close execution mode.

On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S501 that the open / close execution mode is not in progress, in step S502, whether or not the main display unit 45 is in the variable display, that is, the game is in progress. Judge whether or not.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S502 that the main display unit 45 is not in the variable display, the MPU 62 executes the game round start processing of steps S503 to S505.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S502 that the main display unit 45 is in the variable display, the MPU 62 executes the game round progress processing of steps S506 to S509.

First, the game round start processing of steps S503 to S505 will be described.
In step S503, the MPU 62 grasps the number of holdings stored in the holding area Ra for the first result display unit and the number of holdings stored in the holding area Rb for the second result display unit, and these holding numbers. It is determined whether or not the total number CRN of is "0" or less. When the MPU 62 determines in step S503 that the total number CRN is "0" or less, the MPU 62 ends the game times control process.

On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S503 that the total number CRN is not "0" or less, in step S504, the first result display unit holding area Ra or the second result display unit holding area Ra or the second result display unit holding area The data setting process for setting the hold information stored in Rb for the digestion of the game times is executed. After that, in step S505, the MPU 62 executes the variation start process for causing the main display unit 45 and the symbol display device 51 to start the variation display to digest the game times, and ends the game times control process.
Hereinafter, the data setting process in step S504 and the fluctuation start process in step S505 will be described in detail.

FIG. 15 is a diagram showing a flowchart of data setting processing.
In the data setting process, the MPU 62 executes steps S601 to S611 as shown in FIG.
In step S601, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the second start hold storage number RbN of the hold area Rb for the second result display unit set in step S204 of the winning process for the operating port is "0" or less. To do. When the MPU 62 determines in step S601 that the second start hold storage number RbN is "0" or less, the MPU 62 executes the data setting process for the first result display unit of steps S602 to S606, and in step S601. When it is determined that the second start hold storage number RbN is not "0" or less, the data setting process for the second result display unit in steps S607 to S611 is executed.

As described above, the data setting process includes the data setting process for the first result display unit, which sets the hold information stored in the hold area Ra for the first result display unit for digestion of the game times, and the second result display unit. It has a data setting process for a second result display unit that sets the hold information stored in the hold area Rb for digestion of game times.
Then, when the MPU 62 determines in step S601 that the second start hold storage number RbN is not "0" or less, the second result display unit does not execute the data setting process for the first result display unit. Execute the data setting process for. In other words, when the MPU 62 determines that there is hold information stored in the hold area Rb for the second result display unit based on the winning of the game ball to the lower action port 37, the MPU 62 moves to the upper action port 36. Regardless of whether or not there is hold information stored in the hold area Ra for the first result display unit based on the winning of the game ball, the hold information stored in the hold area Rb for the second result display unit is given priority in the game. Set for multiple digestions.

First, the data setting process for the first result display unit in steps S602 to S606 will be described.
In step S602, the MPU 62 is updated by subtracting 1 from the value of the first start hold storage number RaN of the hold area Ra for the first result display unit.
In step S603, the MPU 62 moves the hold information stored in the first area Ra1 of the hold area Ra for the first result display unit to the execution area AE.
In step S604, the MPU 62 executes a data shift process for shifting the hold information stored in the storage area of the hold area Ra for the first result display unit. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the hold information stored in each area Ra1 to Ra4 to the first area Ra1 side. Specifically, the MPU 62 shifts the hold information of the second area Ra2 to the first area Ra1, shifts the hold information of the third area Ra3 to the second area Ra2, and shifts the hold information of the fourth area Ra4 to the third area Ra2. Shift to area Ra3.

In step S605, the MPU 62 clears the second result display unit flag stored in the RAM 64. The second result display unit flag is a flag for specifying which of the first result display unit 45a and the second result display unit 45b, which of the main display unit 45, has started the variable display at the time of digesting the game times. Is. In this step S605, since the MPU 62 has cleared the second result display unit flag, the first result display unit 45a is variablely displayed based on the winning of the game ball to the upper operating port 36 when the game times are digested. Indicates to start.

In step S606, the MPU 62 sets a shift time command for recognizing that the shift of the hold information has been executed, transmits the set shift time command to the voice emission control device 90, and ends the data setting process. This shift command indicates that the shift of the hold information is executed for the hold information stored in the hold area Ra for the first result display unit based on the winning of the game ball to the upper operating port 36. It contains information for 90 to recognize.
The voice emission control device 90 changes the lighting state of the first hold lamp unit 53 based on the shift command transmitted from the MPU 62. Specifically, the voice emission control device 90 reduces the number of lights of the first holding lamp unit 53 as the number of holdings of the game balls winning in the upper operating port 36 decreases.

Next, the data setting process for the second result display unit in steps S607 to S611 will be described.
In step S607, the MPU 62 is updated by subtracting 1 from the value of the second start hold storage number RbN of the hold area Rb for the second result display unit.
In step S608, the MPU 62 moves the hold information stored in the second area Rb1 of the hold area Rb for the second result display unit to the execution area AE.
In step S609, the MPU 62 executes a data shift process for shifting the hold information stored in the storage area of the hold area Rb for the second result display unit. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the hold information stored in each area Rb1 to Rb4 to the first area Rb1 side. Specifically, the MPU 62 shifts the hold information of the second area Rb2 to the first area Rb1, shifts the hold information of the third area Rb3 to the second area Rb2, and shifts the hold information of the fourth area Rb4 to the third area. Shift to area Rb3.

In step S610, the MPU 62 sets the second result display unit flag in the RAM 64. In this step S610, since the MPU 62 sets the second result display unit flag, the second result display unit 45b is variablely displayed based on the winning of the game ball to the lower operating port 37 when the game round is digested. Indicates to start.

In step S611, the MPU 62 sets a shift time command for recognizing that the shift of the hold information has been executed, transmits the set shift time command to the voice emission control device 90, and ends the data setting process. This shift command indicates that the shift of the hold information is executed for the hold information stored in the hold area Rb for the second result display unit based on the winning of the game ball to the lower operating port 37. It contains information for 90 to recognize.
The voice emission control device 90 changes the lighting state of the second hold lamp unit 54 based on the shift command transmitted from the MPU 62. Specifically, the voice emission control device 90 reduces the number of lights of the second holding lamp unit 54 as the number of holding balls winning the lower operating port 37 decreases.

FIG. 16 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the fluctuation start process.
In the variation start process, the MPU 62 executes steps S701 to S717 as shown in FIG.
In step S701, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the second result display unit flag is set in the RAM 64.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S701 that the second result display unit flag is not set in the RAM 64, the MPU 62 starts variable display on the first result display unit 45a based on the winning of the game ball to the upper operating port 36. In step S702, the first pass / fail table (see FIG. 8A) is read from the pass / fail table storage area 63a of the ROM 63.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S701 that the second result display unit flag is set in the RAM 64, the second result display unit 45b based on the winning of the game ball to the lower operating port 37 In step S703, the second pass / fail table (see FIG. 8B) is read from the pass / fail table storage area 63a of the ROM 63.

After executing the process of step S702 or step S703, the MPU 62 executes the pass / fail determination process in step S704. In this pass / fail determination process, the MPU 62 compares the value of the hit random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE with the pass / fail table read in step S702 or step S703, thereby resulting in a win / fail lottery result (win / fail result). To judge. As described above, the winning / failing result is one of "big hit winning", "small hit winning", and "normal loss result", and even if the support mode is the low frequency support mode, the high frequency support mode is used. The same is true if there is one.

In step S705, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the winning / failing result determined in step S704 is a winning occurrence (“big hit winning” or “small hit winning”). When the MPU 62 determines in step S705 that the hit / fail result is a hit, the processes after step S706 are executed, and when it is determined in step S705 that the hit / fail result is not a hit, the MPU 62 is in step S714 or later. Executes the processing of.

First, in step S705, a process (processes after step S706) when it is determined by the MPU 62 that the result of success or failure is a hit will be described.
In step S706, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the second result display unit flag is set in the RAM 64.

When the MPU 62 determines in step S706 that the second result display unit flag is not set in the RAM 64, the MPU 62 starts variable display on the first result display unit 45a based on the winning of the game ball to the upper operating port 36. In step S707, the first distribution table (see FIG. 9A) is read from the distribution table storage area 63b of the ROM 63.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S706 that the second result display unit flag is set in the RAM 64, the second result display unit 45b based on the winning of the game ball to the lower operating port 37 In step S708, the second distribution table (see FIG. 9B) is read from the distribution table storage area 63b of the ROM 63.

After executing the process of step S707 or step S708, the MPU 62 executes the distribution determination process in step S709. In this distribution determination process, the MPU 62 compares the value of the hit type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE with the distribution table read in step S707 or step S708 to obtain the result of the distribution lottery ( Sorting result) is judged.

In step S710, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the winning / failing result determined in step S704 is "big hit winning".
When the MPU 62 determines in step S710 that the winning / failing result is "big hit winning", the MPU 62 executes the stop result setting process for the big hit result in step S711. In the stop result setting process for the jackpot result, the MPU 62 determines the information related to the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the first result display unit 45a of the main display unit 45 according to the distribution result determined in step S709. Then, the determined information is stored in the RAM 64. Here, the MPU 62 finally reaches the first result display unit 45a of the main display unit 45 by comparing the distribution result determined in step S709 with the stop result table for the jackpot result stored in advance in the ROM 63. Determine the information related to the pattern to be stopped and displayed. The stop result table for the jackpot result defines the mode of the pattern to be stopped and displayed on the main display unit 45 differently for each distribution result.

On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S710 that the winning / failing result is not "big hit winning" (when it is determined that the winning / failing result is "small hit winning"), the small hit result in step S712. Executes the stop result setting process for. In the stop result setting process for the small hit result, the MPU 62 determines the information related to the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the first result display unit 45a or the second result display unit 45b of the main display unit 45, and the determination is made. The generated information is stored in the RAM 64. Here, the MPU 62 finally stops and displays the stop display on the first result display unit 45a or the second result display unit 45b of the main display unit 45 by referring to the stop result table for the small hit result stored in advance in the ROM 63. Determine the information related to the pattern to be made.

After executing the process of step S711 or step S712, the MPU 62 sets a flag in the RAM 64 according to the distribution result determined in step S709 in step S713. Specifically, when the MPU 62 identifies that the distribution result is the "low frequency support mode result", it sets the low frequency support mode result flag and indicates that the distribution result is the "high frequency support mode result". If specified, set the high frequency support mode result flag. After that, the MPU 62 executes the processes after step S715.
In each of the following processes, the MPU 62 determines the distribution result by referring to these flags.

Next, in step S705, a process (processes after step S714) when it is determined by the MPU 62 that the hit / fail result is not generated will be described.
In step S714, the MPU 62 normally executes a stop result setting process for the outlier result. In this stop result setting process for the normal deviation result, the MPU 62 determines the information related to the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the first result display unit 45a or the second result display unit 45b of the main display unit 45, and the determination is made. The generated information is stored in the RAM 64. Here, the MPU 62 determines the information related to the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the main display unit 45 by referring to the stop result table for the normal deviation result stored in advance in the ROM 63. The mode of the pattern set in the stop result table for the normal deviation result is different from the mode of the pattern set in the stop result table for the big hit result and the stop result table for the small hit result.

After executing any of the processes of step S711, step S712, and step S714, the MPU 62 executes the display duration (display duration) setting process in step S715.
In the display duration setting process, the MPU 62 acquires the value of the variation type counter CS stored in the variation type counter buffer in the lottery counter buffer of the RAM 64.

Further, in the display duration setting process, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the reach display occurs on the symbol display device 51. Specifically, in the MPU 62, when the winning / failing result determined in step S704 is "big hit winning", the winning / failing result determined in step S704 is "small hit winning" based on the winning of the lower operating port 37. In this case, or if the winning / failing result determined in step S704 is a "normally out of order result" and the reach generation lottery is won, it is determined that the reach display will occur. As described above, the MPU 62 compares the reach table stored in advance in the reach table storage area 63d of the ROM 63 with the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the hold ball storage area 64b. Execute a reach generation lottery.

When the MPU 62 determines that the reach display occurs, the variation type counter acquired from the variation type counter buffer by referring to the reach generation display duration table stored in the reach table storage area 63d of the ROM 63. The display duration corresponding to the value of CS is determined, and the determined display duration is set in the display duration counter provided in various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64.

When the MPU 62 determines that the reach display does not occur, the variation acquired from the variation type counter buffer by referring to the reach non-occurrence display duration table stored in the reach table storage area 63d of the ROM 63. The display duration corresponding to the value of the type counter CS is determined, and the determined display duration is set in the display duration counter provided in various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64.

Specifically, the display duration table for non-reach generation is set so that the display duration becomes shorter as the number of held items increases. Therefore, the display duration when digesting the hold information related to the upper operating port 36 is set so as to become shorter as the number of holdings related to the upper operating port 36 increases. The display duration when the hold information related to the lower operating port 37 is digested is set so as to become shorter as the number of holdings related to the lower operating port 37 increases. In addition, the display duration table for non-reach is set so that when the support mode is the high frequency support mode, the display duration is shorter than when the support mode is the low frequency support mode. In other words, if the number of holdings is the same, the display duration in the high frequency support mode is shorter than that in the low frequency support mode.
Further, the display duration determined by referring to the reach display duration table is different from the display duration determined by referring to the reach non-reach display duration table.

The display duration table for non-reach may be set to the opposite relationship to the above-mentioned relationship, such as increasing the display duration as the number of holds increases, depending on the number of holds and the support mode. It may be configured so as not to fluctuate. In addition, a display duration table may be set individually for each of the winning / failing result and the sorting result.

In step S716, the MPU 62 sets the variation command and the type command. The MPU 62 transmits the variation command and the type command set in step S716 to the voice emission control device 90 in step S301 of the normal process.
The voice emission control device 90 executes a predetermined process based on the variation command and the type command transmitted from the MPU 62. This process will be described in detail later.

The variable command contains information related to the display duration. In addition, the variable command does not include information on whether or not reach display occurs.
Here, as described above, the display duration determined by referring to the reach occurrence display duration table and the display duration determined by referring to the reach non-reach display duration table are mutually exclusive. It's different.
Therefore, even if the information on whether or not the reach display occurs is not included in the variable command, the reach display is displayed by the voice emission control device 90, which is the control device on the sub side, based on the information related to the display duration. It is possible to determine whether or not it occurs. In this sense, it can be said that the variable command indirectly includes information on whether or not a reach display occurs. The variable command may directly include information on whether or not reach display occurs.

The type command contains information related to the result of success or failure. In other words, the type command includes each information related to "big hit winning", "small hit winning", and "normal loss result" as information related to the winning / failing result. In addition, the type command includes information related to the distribution result. In other words, the type command includes each information related to the "low frequency support mode result" and the "high frequency support mode result" as the information related to the distribution result.
In the following description, the winning / failing result and the sorting result are collectively referred to as a game result. In other words, the type command contains information related to the game result.

In step S717, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the second result display unit flag is set in the RAM 64, and causes the main display unit 45 to start variable display based on the determination result. After that, the MPU 62 ends the fluctuation start process.
Specifically, when the MPU 62 determines that the second result display unit flag is not set in the RAM 64, the first one is based on the winning of the game ball to the upper operating port 36 at the time of digesting the game times. Since it indicates that the result display unit 45a starts the variable display, the first result display unit 45a is made to start the variable display.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines that the second result display unit flag is set in the RAM 64, the MPU 62 is second based on the winning of the game ball to the lower operating port 37 at the time of digesting the game times. Since it indicates that the result display unit 45b starts the variable display, the second result display unit 45b is made to start the variable display.

Returning to the description of the game time control process, the game time progress process of steps S506 to S509 will be described with reference to FIG.
In step S502, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the main display unit 45 is in the variable display, and if it is determined that the main display unit 45 is in the variable display, the MPU 62 is for advancing the game times in steps S506 to S509. Execute the process.

In step S506, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the display duration set in step S715 of the fluctuation start process has elapsed. Specifically, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the value set in the display duration counter of the RAM 64 is "0" or less. The value of this display duration counter is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed.

When the MPU 62 determines in step S506 that the display duration has not elapsed, the MPU 62 executes the variable display process in step S507. In this variation display process, the MPU 62 updates the display of the main display unit 45 during the variation display. After that, the MPU 62 ends the game times control process.

On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S506 that the display duration has elapsed, the MPU 62 executes the variation end processing in step S508. In this variation end process, the MPU 62 stores information (main) stored in the RAM 64 in any of the processes of step S711, step S712, and step S714 of the variation start process executed when the main display unit 45 starts the variation display. Information related to the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the display unit 45) is specified. Then, at the end of the game round, the MPU 62 executes the display control of the main display unit 45 so that the pattern corresponding to the specified information is displayed on the main display unit 45 during the variable display. The fluctuation end processing will be described in detail later.

Here, the pattern that is finally stopped and displayed on the main display unit 45 differs depending on the type of game result. Therefore, the manager of the game hall or the like can confirm the game result by visually observing the main display unit 45 at the end of the game round. According to this, for example, the manager of the amusement park can easily confirm whether or not a fraudulent act is performed to make the pachinko machine 10 perform the same behavior as when the lottery for the occurrence of a big hit is won. Can be done
Further, the main display unit 45 has a narrower display area than the display screen G of the symbol display device 51, and the symbol to be stopped and displayed on the main display unit 45 is a symbol sequence to be stopped and displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 51. Compared to Z1 to Z3, it is difficult for the player to recognize. Therefore, at the end of the game round, the player determines whether or not he / she has won the lottery for winning by checking the display screen G of the symbol display device 51 instead of the main display unit 45. , The degree of attention to the display screen G can be increased.

In step S509, the MPU 62 sets the variable end command. The MPU 62 transmits the variation end command set in step S509 to the voice emission control device 90 in step S301 of the normal process. After that, the MPU 62 ends the game times control process.
The voice emission control device 90 executes a process for ending the effect of the game round based on the variable end command transmitted from the MPU 62. Here, the voice emission control device 90 may be configured to independently end the production of the game times without requiring the reception of the variable end command.

<Game state transition process>
FIG. 17 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the game state transition process.
In the game state transition process, the MPU 62 executes steps S801 to S820 as shown in FIG.
In step S801, the MPU 62 determines whether or not it is in the open / close execution mode.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S801 that the open / close execution mode is not in progress, the MPU 62 executes the processes after step S802.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S801 that it is in the open / close execution mode, the MPU 62 executes the processes after step S811.

First, in step S801, a process when the MPU 62 determines that the open / close execution mode is not in progress (processes after step S802) will be described.
In step S802, the MPU 62 determines whether or not it is in the variable ball entry execution mode.
The MPU 62 determines whether or not the player is in the variable ball entry execution mode by referring to the variable ball entry execution mode flag stored in the RAM 64. The same applies to each of the following processes. The MPU 62 sets the variable entry execution mode flag at the time of transition to the variable entry execution mode, and clears the variable entry execution mode flag at the end of the variable entry execution mode.

When the MPU 62 determines in step S802 that it is not in the variable ball entry execution mode, the MPU 62 executes the processes after step S803.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S802 that it is in the variable ball entry execution mode, the MPU 62 executes the processes after step S816.

First, in step S802, a process when the MPU 62 determines that the variable ball entry execution mode is not in progress (processes after step S803) will be described.
In step S803, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the variable display of the main display unit 45 has been completed. When it is determined in step S803 that the variation display of the main display unit 45 has not been completed, the MPU 62 ends the game state transition process.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S803 that the variable display of the main display unit 45 is completed, a hit / fail result occurs in step S804 (“big hit win” or “small hit win”). It is determined whether or not it is.

When it is determined in step S804 that the hit / fail result is not generated, the MPU 62 ends the game state transition process.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S804 that the winning / failing result is a hit, the MPU 62 determines in step S805 whether or not the winning / failing result is a “small hit winning”.

When the MPU 62 determines in step S805 that the winning / failing result is "small hit winning", the MPU 62 sets the variable entry execution mode flag in the RAM 64 in step S806, and then ends the game state transition process.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S805 that the winning / failing result is not "small hit winning" (when it is determined that the winning / failing result is "big hit winning"), the MPU 62 opens / closes to the RAM 64 in step S807. After setting the execution mode flag, the processes after step S808 are executed.

In step S808, the MPU 62 sets “15” in the round counter RC provided in various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64. This round counter RC is a counter for specifying the number of round games by the MPU 62 when shifting to the open / close execution mode.

Here, the open / close execution mode ends on the condition that the round game has been executed a predetermined number of times. Here, the number of round games corresponds to the value set in the round counter RC.
The pachinko machine 10 opens and closes the large winning opening 38a once for each round game. In addition, one round game continues until one of the following two conditions is met. In other words, the pachinko machine 10 sets the opening / closing door 38b to the open state, and then sets the opening / closing door 38b to the closed state again by satisfying one of the following two conditions.
(1) The predetermined upper limit duration (upper limit duration) has elapsed. (2) The total number of winning balls to the large winning opening 38a reaches the predetermined upper limit.

In step S809, the MPU 62 sets “1000” as the waiting time (standby period) for the opening in the timer counter T provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64. The value set in the timer counter T is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed. Therefore, the waiting time for the opening is 2 sec. The waiting time for the opening is not limited to this and is arbitrary.

As described above, in step S809, the MPU 62 sets the waiting time for the opening in the timer counter T regardless of the type of the distribution result. In other words, the waiting time for the opening is the same regardless of the type of distribution result.
The waiting time for the opening is not limited to this, and for example, the waiting time may be slightly different depending on the type of distribution result to the extent that the player recognizes the same. Further, for example, the waiting time for the opening differs greatly between the case of the distribution result of the "low frequency support mode result" and the case of the distribution result of the "high frequency support mode result". , The configuration may be significantly different depending on the type of distribution result.

In step S810, the MPU 62 sets the opening command. After that, the MPU 62 ends the game state transition process. This opening command includes information on the distribution result that triggered the transition to the open / close execution mode. The MPU 62 transmits the opening command set in step S810 to the voice emission control device 90 in step S301 of the normal process.
The voice emission control device 90 recognizes the transition to the open / close execution mode based on the opening command transmitted from the MPU 62, and executes a predetermined process. This process will be described in detail later.

Next, in step S801, a process when the MPU 62 determines that the open / close execution mode is in progress (processes after step S811) will be described.
In step S811, the MPU 62 executes the large winning opening opening / closing process.

FIG. 18 is a diagram showing a flowchart of a large winning opening opening / closing process.
In the large winning opening opening / closing process, the MPU 62 executes steps S901 to S916 as shown in FIG.
In step S901, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the large winning opening 38a is open.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S901 that the large winning opening 38a is not open, the MPU 62 executes the processes after step S902.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S901 that the large winning opening 38a is open, the MPU 62 executes the processes after step S906.

First, in step S901, a process when the MPU 62 determines that the large winning opening 38a is not open (processes after step S902) will be described.
In step S902, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the value of the round counter RC is “0” or less.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S902 that the value of the round counter RC is "0" or less, the MPU 62 ends the large winning opening opening / closing process.

On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S902 that the value of the round counter RC is not "0" or less, whether or not the value of the timer counter T is "0" or less in step S903. To judge.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S903 that the value of the timer counter T is not "0" or less, the MPU 62 ends the large winning opening opening / closing process.

On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S903 that the value of the timer counter T is "0" or less, the MPU 62 executes the large winning opening opening process in step S904.
Hereinafter, the process of opening the large winning opening in step S904 will be described in detail.

FIG. 19 is a diagram showing a flowchart of a large winning opening opening process.
In the large winning opening opening process, the MPU 62 executes steps S1001 to S1003 as shown in FIG.
In step S1001, "8" is set in the winning counter PC provided in various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64, and "15000" is set in the timer counter T in step S1002. As described above, the timer counter T is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed. Therefore, the time set in the timer counter T is 30 sec.

In step S1003, the MPU 62 executes the opening execution process of the large winning opening 38a. In this opening execution process, the MPU 62 sets the opening / closing door 38b to the open state by executing the drive control of the variable winning drive unit 38c. After that, the MPU 62 finishes the large winning opening opening process.

The value set in the winning counter PC in step S1001 defines the upper limit of the total number of winning balls to the large winning opening 38a.
Further, the value set in the timer counter T in step S1002 defines the upper limit duration from setting the opening / closing door 38b to the open state to setting it to the closed state again.

Here, as described above, the pachinko machine 10 causes the game ball launching mechanism 81 to launch the game ball by exciting the solenoid of the game ball launching mechanism 81 at a cycle of 0.6 sec. Further, as described above, the MPU 62 sets the upper limit of the total number of winning balls to the large winning opening 38a to 8 by setting "8" in the winning counter PC.
Therefore, since the upper limit duration is sufficiently longer than the product of the upper limit of the total number of game balls to be won in the large winning opening 38a and the firing cycle of the game balls, the upper limit of eight game balls is used as the large winning opening. It is easy to get a prize in 38a.

Returning to the description of the large winning opening opening / closing process, the process after step S905 will be described with reference to FIG.
The MPU 62 sets the release command in step S905 after executing the large winning opening opening process in step S904. Further, the MPU 62 transmits the release command set in step S905 to the voice emission control device 90 in step S301 of the normal process. After that, the MPU 62 ends the large winning opening opening / closing process.
The voice emission control device 90 recognizes that the opening / closing door 38b is set to the open state based on the opening command transmitted from the MPU 62, and executes a predetermined process.

Next, in step S901, a process when the MPU 62 determines that the large winning opening 38a is open (processes after step S906) will be described.
In step S906, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the value of the timer counter T is "0" or less. That is, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the upper limit duration set in the timer counter T has elapsed in step S1002 of the large winning opening opening process.

When the MPU 62 determines in step S906 that the value of the timer counter T is not "0" or less, the MPU 62 executes the processes after step S907.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S906 that the value of the timer counter T is "0" or less, the MPU 62 executes the processes after step S910.

In step S907, the MPU 62 determines whether or not a prize has been generated in the large winning opening 38a. The determination as to whether or not a prize has been generated in the large winning opening 38a is executed based on the detection result of the detection sensor 50d corresponding to the large winning opening 38a.

When it is determined in step S907 that the winning opening 38a has not been won, the MPU 62 ends the opening / closing process of the winning opening.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step S907 that a prize has been generated in the large winning opening 38a, the MPU 62 updates by subtracting 1 from the value of the winning counter PC in step S908.

In step S909, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the value of the winning counter PC is "0" or less.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S909 that the value of the winning counter PC is not "0" or less, the MPU 62 ends the large winning opening opening / closing process.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S909 that the value of the winning counter PC is "0" or less, or when it determines in step S906 that the value of the timer counter T is "0" or less. In step S910, the closing execution process is executed. In this closing execution process, the MPU 62 sets the opening / closing door 38b to the closed state by executing the drive control of the variable winning drive unit 38c.

In step S911, the MPU 62 sets the closure command. The MPU 62 transmits the closing command set in step S911 to the voice emission control device 90 in step S301 of the normal process.
The voice emission control device 90 recognizes that the opening / closing door 38b is set to the closed state based on the closing command transmitted from the MPU 62, and executes a predetermined process.

In step S912, the MPU 62 is updated by subtracting 1 from the value of the round counter RC.
In step S913, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the value of the round counter RC is “0” or less.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S913 that the value of the round counter RC is not "0" or less, the MPU 62 sets the value of the timer counter T to "500" in step S914. After that, the MPU 62 ends the large winning opening opening / closing process.

Here, the value set in the timer counter T in step S914 is an open standby until the opening / closing door 38b is set to the open state, the opening / closing door 38b is set to the closed state again, and the opening / closing door 38b is set to the open state again. The time is specified. In this embodiment, the opening standby time is 1 sec. This opening standby time is the same regardless of the progress of the opening / closing execution mode.

On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S913 that the value of the round counter RC is "0" or less, the MPU 62 executes the processes after step S915.
In step S915, the MPU 62 sets the timer counter T to "2000" as the waiting time (waiting period) for the ending. As described above, the value set in the timer counter T is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed. Therefore, the waiting time for the ending is 4 sec. The waiting time for the ending is not limited to this and is arbitrary.

The waiting time for the ending is the same as the waiting time for the opening regardless of the type of distribution result.
The waiting time for the ending is not limited to this, and may be configured to be slightly different depending on the type of distribution result to the extent that the player recognizes the same. Further, for example, the waiting time for the ending differs greatly between the case of the distribution result of the "low frequency support mode result" and the case of the distribution result of the "high frequency support mode result". , The configuration may be significantly different depending on the type of distribution result.

In step S916, the MPU 62 sets the ending command. The MPU 62 transmits the ending command set in step S916 to the voice emission control device 90 in step S301 of the normal process. After that, the MPU 62 ends the large winning opening opening / closing process.
The voice emission control device 90 recognizes the end of the open / close execution mode based on the ending command transmitted from the MPU 62, and executes a predetermined process.

Returning to the description of the game state transition process, the processes after step S812 will be described with reference to FIG.
After executing the large winning opening opening / closing process in step S811, the MPU 62 determines in step S812 whether or not the value of the round counter RC is “0” or less.

When the MPU 62 determines in step S812 that the value of the round counter RC is not "0" or less, the MPU 62 ends the game state transition process.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S812 that the value of the round counter RC is "0" or less, whether or not the value of the timer counter T is "0" or less in step S813. To judge.

When the MPU 62 determines in step S813 that the value of the timer counter T is not "0" or less, the MPU 62 ends the game state transition process.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S813 that the value of the timer counter T is "0" or less, the MPU 62 clears the open / close execution mode flag stored in the RAM 64 in step S814.
In step S815, the MPU 62 executes the transition process at the end of the open / close execution mode. After that, the MPU 62 ends the game state transition process.
Hereinafter, the transition process at the end of the open / close execution mode will be described in detail.

FIG. 20 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the transition process at the end of the open / close execution mode.
In the transition process at the end of the open / close execution mode, the MPU 62 executes steps S1101 to S1108 as shown in FIG.
In step S1101, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the distribution result is a “high frequency support mode result”.

When the MPU 62 determines in step S1101 that the distribution result is the "high frequency support mode result", the MPU 62 executes the processes after step S1102.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1101 that the distribution result is not the "high frequency support mode result" (when the distribution result is determined to be the "low frequency support mode result"), the MPU 62 determines. The processing after step S1105 is executed.
First, in step S1101, the process when the MPU 62 determines that the distribution result is the “high frequency support mode result” (processes after step S1102) will be described.

In step S1102, the MPU 62 sets the high frequency support flag in the RAM 64. The MPU 62 maintains the high frequency support flag if it has already been set in the RAM 64. As a result, the MPU 62 sets the support mode to the high frequency support mode.
In step S1103, the special mode flag stored in the RAM 64 is cleared.

Here, the pachinko machine 10 has a plurality of game modes having different support modes, which are shifted after the opening / closing execution mode is completed. Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 has a normal mode in which the support mode is set after the opening / closing execution mode ends according to the distribution results of the "low frequency support mode result" and the "high frequency support mode result", and a "low frequency support". Regardless of the distribution result of "mode result" and "high frequency support mode result", the game mode has a special mode in which the support mode is set to the high frequency support mode after the opening / closing execution mode ends.

The special mode flag is a flag for specifying which game mode is the normal mode or the special mode. In step S1103, since the MPU 62 has cleared the special mode flag, the game mode is set to the normal mode.

In step S1104, the MPU 62 sets “100” to the value of the game count counter RTC provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64. After that, the MPU 62 ends the transition process at the end of the open / close execution mode.
Here, when the high-frequency support flag is set in the RAM 64, the high-frequency support mode continues until 100 game times, which is the end reference number set in the game number counter RTC, is exhausted. The MPU 62 clears the high frequency support flag when 100 game times have been completed. As a result, the MPU 62 sets the support mode to the low frequency support mode.

Next, in step S1101, the process when the MPU 62 determines that the distribution result is not the “high frequency support mode result” (processes after step S1105) will be described.
When the distribution result is determined not to be the "high frequency support mode result" in step S1101 (when the distribution result is determined to be the "low frequency support mode result"), the MPU 62 is determined in step S1105. It is determined whether or not the special mode flag is set in the RAM 64.

When the MPU 62 determines in step S1105 that the special mode flag is set in the RAM 64 (when it is determined that the game mode is the special mode), the MPU 62 executes the processes after step S1102 described above. In other words, when the game mode is a special mode, the MPU 62 frequently switches to the support mode after the opening / closing execution mode ends regardless of the distribution results of the "low frequency support mode result" and the "high frequency support mode result". Set to support mode.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step S1105 that the special mode flag is not set in the RAM 64 (when it is determined that the game mode is the normal mode), the MPU 62 is stored in the RAM 64 in step S1106. Clear the high frequency support flag. As a result, the MPU 62 sets the support mode to the low frequency support mode.

In step S1107, the MPU 62 sets the special mode flag in the RAM 64. The MPU 62 maintains the special mode flag if it has already been set in the RAM 64. As a result, the MPU 62 sets the game mode to the special mode.
In step S1108, the MPU 62 sets “30” to the value of the game count counter RTC provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64. After that, the MPU 62 ends the transition process at the end of the open / close execution mode.

Here, when the special mode flag is set in the RAM 64, the special mode continues until 30 game times, which is the end reference number set in the game number counter RTC, is exhausted. The MPU 62 clears the special mode flag when it has completed 30 game times. As a result, the MPU 62 sets the game mode to the normal mode.
After executing the process of step S1108, the MPU 62 clears the hold information stored in the hold area Rb for the second result display unit based on the winning of the game ball to the lower operating port 37.

In this way, when a hit occurs in the winning / failing lottery and the sorting result becomes the "high frequency support mode result" in the sorting lottery, the game state is the open / close execution mode regardless of the current game state. After the end, it shifts to the high frequency support mode. The high-frequency support mode shifts to the low-frequency support mode when 100 game times have been completed without a hit in the winning / losing lottery. In the high frequency support mode, the game mode is always the normal mode.

In addition, when a hit occurs in the winning / failing lottery and the sorting result becomes the "low frequency support mode result" in the sorting lottery, the game state is the open / close execution mode if the game mode is the special mode. After the end, the mode shifts to the high frequency support mode, and if the game mode is the normal mode, the mode shifts to the low frequency support mode after the end of the open / close execution mode. The high-frequency support mode shifts to the low-frequency support mode when 100 game times have been completed without a hit in the winning / losing lottery. In the high frequency support mode, the game mode is always the normal mode. The low frequency support mode continues at least until a win occurs in the winning or losing lottery. In the low frequency support mode, the game mode stays in the special mode until 30 game times are exhausted, and then shifts to the normal mode.

In addition, if there is no winning in the winning / failing lottery, that is, if the winning / failing result becomes a "normally out of order result" in the winning / failing lottery, the gaming state does not shift.

Here, the value of the game count counter RTC is included in the above-mentioned variable command. Further, the information related to the game mode (information related to whether or not the special mode flag is set in the RAM 64) is included in the above-mentioned opening command.

Returning to the description of the game state transition process, the processes after step S816 will be described with reference to FIG.
In step S802, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the ball is in the variable ball entry execution mode, and if it is determined that the ball is in the variable ball entry execution mode, executes the processes after step S816.

In step S816, the MPU 62 executes the variable ball entry execution process.
Hereinafter, the variable ball entry execution process will be described in detail.

FIG. 21 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the variable ball input execution process.
In the variable ball entry execution process, the MPU 62 executes steps S1201 to S1215 as shown in FIG.
In step S1201, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the blade member 401a is open.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S1201 that the blade member 401a is not open, the MPU 62 executes the processes after step S1202.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1201 that the blade member 401a is open, the MPU 62 executes the processes after step S1207.

First, in step S1201, a process when the MPU 62 determines that the blade member 401a is not open (processes after step S1202) will be described.
In step S1202, the MPU 62 executes the blade member opening execution process. In this blade member opening execution process, the MPU 62 sets the blade member 401a to the open state by executing the drive control of the blade member driving unit 401c.

In step S1203, a blade member release command is set. Further, the MPU 62 transmits the blade member opening command set in step S1204 to the voice emission control device 90 in step S301 of the normal process.
The voice emission control device 90 recognizes that the blade member 401a has been set to the open state based on the blade member release command transmitted from the MPU 62, and executes a predetermined process.

In step S1204, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the high frequency support flag or the special mode flag is set in the RAM 64.

When the MPU 62 determines in step S1204 that the high frequency support flag or the special mode flag is set in the RAM 64, the timer counter T is set to "1000" in step S1205. As described above, the timer counter T is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed. Therefore, the time set in the timer counter T is 2 sec. After that, the MPU 62 ends the variable ball entry execution process.

On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1204 that the high frequency support flag or the special mode flag is not set in the RAM 64 (when it is determined that the RAM 64 is in the low frequency support mode of the normal mode), the step In S1206, "50" is set in the timer counter T. As described above, the timer counter T is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed. Therefore, the time set in the timer counter T is 0.1 sec. After that, the MPU 62 ends the variable ball entry execution process.

Next, in step S1201, a process (processes after step S1207) when the blade member 401a is determined to be open by the MPU 62 will be described.
In step S1207, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the value of the timer counter T is "0" or less.

When the MPU 62 determines in step S1207 that the value of the timer counter T is not "0" or less, the MPU 62 executes the processes after step S1208.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1207 that the value of the timer counter T is "0" or less, the MPU 62 executes the processes after step S1214.

First, in step S1207, processing when the value of the timer counter T is determined by the MPU 62 to be not "0" or less (processing after step S1208) will be described.
In step S1208, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the opening / closing of the plate 403a has been executed by referring to the plate opening / closing executed flag stored in the RAM 64. This plate open / close executed flag is a flag for identifying that the plate 403a has been opened / closed between the time when the blade member 401a is set to the open state and the time when the blade member 401a is set to the closed state. The MPU 62 sets the plate open / close executed flag when the plate 403a is opened / closed, and clears the plate open / close executed flag when the blade member 401a is set to the closed state.

When the MPU 62 determines in step S1208 that the opening / closing of the plate 403a has been executed (when the plate opening / closing executed flag is set in the RAM 64), the MPU 62 ends the variable ball entry execution process.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1208 that the opening / closing of the plate 403a has not been executed (when the plate opening / closing executed flag is not set in the RAM 64), the timer counter T is set in step S1209. It is determined whether or not the value is "500" or less. In other words, in the high frequency support mode or the special mode, the MPU 62 determines whether or not 1 sec has elapsed after setting the blade member 401a to the open state. In the low frequency support mode of the normal mode, since the MPU 62 sets the timer counter T to "50" in step S1206, it is determined in step S1209 that the value of the timer counter T is "500" or less. Will be done.

When the MPU 62 determines in step S1209 that the value of the timer counter T is not "500" or less (in the high frequency support mode or the special mode, 1 sec has not passed since the blade member 401a was set to the open state. If it is determined), the variable ball entry execution process is terminated.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1209 that the value of the timer counter T is "500" or less (in the high frequency support mode or the special mode, after setting the blade member 401a to the open state, 1 sec. When it is determined that the above has passed), the plate opening process is executed in step S1210. In this plate opening process, the MPU 62 sets the plate 403a to the open state by executing the drive control of the plate driving unit 403c.

In step S1211, it is determined whether or not the value of the timer counter T is "400" or less. In other words, in the high frequency support mode or the special mode, the MPU 62 determines whether 0.2 sec has elapsed after setting the plate 403a in the open state. In the low frequency support mode of the normal mode, since the MPU 62 sets the timer counter T to "50" in step S1206, it is determined in step S1211 that the value of the timer counter T is "400" or less. Will be done.

When the MPU 62 determines in step S1211 that the value of the timer counter T is not "400" or less (in the high frequency support mode or the special mode, 0.2 sec has not passed since the plate 403a was set to the open state. If it is determined), the variable ball entry execution process is terminated.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1211 that the value of the timer counter T is "400" or less (in the high frequency support mode or the special mode, after setting the plate 403a to the open state, 0. If it is determined that 2 sec has passed), the plate closing process is executed in step S1212. In this plate closing process, the MPU 62 sets the plate 403a to the closed state by executing the drive control of the plate driving unit 403c.

In step S1213, the MPU 62 sets the plate open / close executed flag by substituting 1 for the area indicating the plate open / close executed flag provided in the various flag storage areas 64d of the RAM 64. After that, the MPU 62 ends the variable ball entry execution process.

Next, in step S1207, processing when the value of the timer counter T is determined by the MPU 62 to be “0” or less (processing after step S1214) will be described.
In step S1214, the MPU 62 executes the blade member closing execution process. In this blade member closing execution process, the MPU 62 sets the blade member 401a to the closed state by executing the drive control of the blade member driving unit 401c.

In step S1215, the MPU 62 assigns 0 to the area indicating the plate open / close executed flag and the variable entry execution mode flag provided in the various flag storage areas 64d of the RAM 64, thereby indicating the plate open / close executed flag and the variable entry. Clear the flag in ball execution mode. After that, the MPU 62 ends the variable ball entry execution process.

As described above, in the variable ball entry execution mode, the MPU 62 sets the blade member 401a in the open state, enables the game ball to enter the right variable ball entry mechanism 40, and sets the plate 403a in the open state or the closed state. It is set so that the game ball can enter either the right entry port 404 or the left entry port 405.

Further, in the variable ball entry execution mode in the high frequency support mode or the special mode, the blade member 401a is set to the open state for the time (opening period) from when the plate 403a is set to the open state until when the plate 403a is set to the closed state again. After that, it is shorter than the time (opening period) until it is set to the closed state again. Specifically, the opening period of the plate 403a (0.2 sec in the present embodiment) is about 1/10 of the opening period of the blade member 401a (2 sec in the present embodiment). In other words, the game ball that has entered the right variable entry mechanism 40 has a probability of entering the right entry port 404 with a probability of about 1/10.

In the present embodiment, the plate 403a executes one opening / closing operation during the opening period of the blade member 401a, but may perform a plurality of opening / closing operations.
Further, in the present embodiment, the opening period of the plate 403a is set to 0.2 sec and the opening period of the blade member 401a is set to 2 sec, but an opening period other than these may be adopted.
Further, in the present embodiment, the MPU 62 sets the plate 403a to the open state when it is determined that 1 sec has elapsed after setting the blade member 401a to the open state, but sets the plate 403a to the open state. A timing other than this may be adopted as the timing to perform the operation.

On the other hand, in the variable ball entry execution mode in the low frequency support mode of the normal mode, the time (opening period) from setting the blade member 401a to the closed state to setting it to the closed state again is 0.2 sec. Yes, the plate 403a opens and closes immediately after the blade member 401a is set to the open state. In other words, the game ball cannot enter the right variable ball entry mechanism 40.

Returning to the description of the game state transition process, the processes after step S817 will be described with reference to FIG.
After executing the variable ball entry execution process of step S816, the MPU 62 determines in step S817 whether or not the detection sensor 50 g corresponding to the right ball entry port 404 has detected the winning of the game ball, thereby performing right entry. It is determined whether or not the game ball has won a prize (V prize) at the ball mouth 404.

When the MPU 62 determines in step S817 that the game ball has won a prize in the right entrance 404, the MPU 62 executes the V winning success process in step S818. In this V winning success process, the MPU 62 executes the drive control of the blade member drive unit 401c to set the blade member 401a to the closed state, and then executes the plate open / close executed flag and the variable ball entry stored in the RAM 64. Clear the in-mode flag. Further, in the V winning success processing, the MPU 62 sets the V winning success command. The MPU 62 transmits the V winning success command set in step S818 to the voice emission control device 90 in step S301 of the normal process. After that, the MPU 62 executes the processes after step S807 described above.
The voice emission control device 90 recognizes that the game ball has won a prize in the right entry port 404 based on the V winning success command transmitted from the MPU 62, and executes a predetermined process.

On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S817 that the game ball has not won a prize in the right entry port 404, the MPU 62 determines in step S819 whether or not the blade member 401a is set to the closed state. To do.

When it is determined in step S819 that the blade member 401a is not set to the closed state, the MPU 62 ends the game state transition process.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step S819 that the blade member 401a is set to the closed state, the MPU 62 executes the V winning failure process in step S820. In this V winning failure process, the MPU 62 sets a V winning failure command. The MPU 62 transmits the V winning failure command set in step S820 to the voice emission control device 90 in step S301 of the normal process. After that, the MPU 62 ends the game state transition process.
The voice emission control device 90 recognizes that the game ball has not won a prize in the right entry port 404 based on the V winning failure command transmitted from the MPU 62, and executes a predetermined process.

In this way, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the open / close execution mode as it is when it becomes a "big win" in the winning / losing lottery, whereas it is variable when it becomes a "small hit winning" in the winning / losing lottery. It shifts to the ball entry execution mode, and when a ball enters the right ball entry port 404 in this variable ball entry execution mode, it shifts to the open / close execution mode.
In the pachinko machine 10, in the variable ball entry execution mode, only the ball entering the left ball entry port 405 occurs, or the ball enters the right ball entry port 404 and the left ball entry port 405. If not, the mode does not shift to the open / close execution mode.

Here, as described above, in the low frequency support mode, the game ball has a higher probability of winning the upper operating port 36 than the lower operating port 37. In addition, as a result of the internal lottery conducted based on the winning of the upper operating port 36, the probability of winning a small hit is 1/6.
However, in the low frequency support mode of the normal mode, as described above, when the result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning of the upper operating port 36 is "small hit winning", the game ball is on the right side. It is not possible to enter the variable ball entry mechanism 40.
In the low frequency support mode of the special mode, when the result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning of the upper operating port 36 is "small hit winning", the game ball is changed to the right variable ball entering mechanism 40. Since it is possible to enter the ball, the probability of winning the jackpot occurrence is about 1/60 by shifting to the variable entry execution mode triggered by the winning of the upper operating port 36.

<Variation end processing>
FIG. 22 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the variation end process.
In the variable end process, the MPU 62 executes steps S1301 to S1309 as shown in FIG.
In step S1301, the MPU 62 stores information stored in the RAM 64 in any of the processes of step S711, step S712, and step S714 of the variation start process executed when the main display unit 45 starts the variation display (main display unit). Information related to the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on 45) is specified. Then, at the end of the game round, the MPU 62 executes the display control of the main display unit 45 so that the pattern corresponding to the specified information is displayed on the main display unit 45 during the variable display (variation end execution process).

In step S1302, the MPU 62 determines whether the support mode is a high frequency support mode.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S1302 that the support mode is not the high frequency support mode, the MPU 62 executes the processes after step S1306.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1302 that the support mode is the high-frequency support mode, the game count counter set in step S1104 of the transition process at the end of the open / close execution mode in step S1303. Update by subtracting 1 from the RTC value. Here, the variation command set in step S716 described above includes the value of the game count counter RTC.
In step S1304, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the game count counter RTC is "0" or less.

When the MPU 62 determines in step S1304 that the game count counter RTC is not "0" or less, the MPU 62 executes the processes after step S1306.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1304 that the game count counter RTC is "0" or less, the MPU 62 clears the high frequency support flag stored in the RAM 64 in step S1305. As a result, the MPU 62 sets the support mode to the low frequency support mode.

In this way, when the winning / losing lottery results in "big hit winning" and the high frequency support flag is set in the RAM 64, the gaming state is set to the open / close execution mode (that is, the round number regulation mode) regardless of the current gaming state. After the end, it shifts to the high frequency support mode. The high-frequency support mode continues until 100 game times, which is the end reference number set in the game number counter RTC, is exhausted.

After executing the process of step S1305, if it is determined in step S1302 that the support mode is not the high frequency support mode, or if it is determined in step S1304 that the game count counter RTC is not "0" or less, the MPU 62 , In step S1306, it is determined whether or not the game mode is a special mode.
When it is determined in step S1306 that the game mode is not the special mode (when it is determined that the game mode is the normal mode), the MPU 62 ends the variable end process without executing the processes after step S1307. ..
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1306 that the game mode is the special mode, the game count counter RTC set in step S1108 of the transition process at the end of the open / close execution mode in step S1307 Update by subtracting 1 from the value. Here, the variation command set in step S716 described above includes the value of the game count counter RTC.

In step S1308, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the game count counter RTC is "0" or less.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S1308 that the game count counter RTC is not "0" or less, the MPU 62 ends the variable end process without executing the processes after step S1309.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1308 that the game count counter RTC is "0" or less, the MPU 62 clears the special mode flag stored in the RAM 64 in step S1309. As a result, the MPU 62 sets the game mode to the normal mode. After that, the MPU 62 ends the fluctuation end processing.

In this way, when the winning / losing lottery results in "big hit winning" and the special mode flag is set in the RAM 64, the game state ends regardless of the current game state (that is, the round number specified mode). Later, it shifts to the special mode. The special mode continues until 30 game times, which is the end reference number set in the game number counter RTC, is exhausted.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the main control device 60 functions as a game state transition means for shifting the game state based on the result of the internal lottery.
Further, in the present embodiment, the low frequency support mode has a game mode of a normal mode and a special mode.

Then, in the present embodiment, the main control device 60 has a low frequency in the normal mode and the high frequency support mode of the low frequency support mode based on the result of the internal lottery (low frequency support mode result or high frequency support mode result). The game state is shifted to either the support mode or the high frequency support mode, and in the special mode of the low frequency support mode, the game state is shifted to the high frequency support mode regardless of the result of the internal lottery. According to this, the player will play with the expectation that he / she will stay in the special mode even when the gaming state is shifted to the low frequency support mode. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 is the player. It is possible to improve the degree of attention to the game.
In the present embodiment, the high-frequency support mode does not have the game mode of the special mode, but it may have it.

Further, in the present embodiment, the main control device 60 is set to the opening / closing execution mode which is advantageous for the player based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the upper operating port 36 and the lower operating port 37. When the game state is changed from the normal control state and the game state is changed from the open / close execution mode to the normal control state, the game state is changed to either the low frequency support mode or the high frequency support mode. According to this, when the player shifts to the low frequency support mode, he / she pays attention to whether or not he / she stays in the special mode. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 pays attention to the player's game. Can be improved.

Further, in the present embodiment, the right variable ball entry mechanism 40 fires toward the right-handed route based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the upper operating port 36 or the lower operating port 37. It functions as a variable ball entry mechanism that enables the ball to be entered. Then, the main control device 60 shifts the game state from the normal control state to the open / close execution mode when the game ball enters the right variable ball entry mechanism 40. Here, the probability of shifting to the open / close execution mode via the variable entry execution mode (about 1 / 12.5) is based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the lower operating port 37. , Based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the upper operating port 36, the probability of shifting to the open / close execution mode via the variable entry execution mode (about 1/60) is higher. There is. According to this, the player expects to shift the game state to the high-frequency support mode, so that the pachinko machine 10 can improve the player's attention to the game.

Further, in the present embodiment, the main control device 60 is set to either the normal mode or the special mode based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the upper operating port 36 and the lower operating port 37. Shift the game mode. Specifically, the main control device 60 shifts the gaming mode to the special mode when shifting to the low-frequency support mode, and shifts to the normal mode when shifting to the high-frequency support mode. Shift the game mode to. According to this, the player pays attention to the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the upper operating port 36 and the lower operating port 37, so that the pachinko machine 10 is the player's game. It is possible to improve the degree of attention to.
In the present embodiment, the main control device 60 shifts the gaming mode to the special mode when shifting to the low frequency support mode, and shifts the gaming state to the high frequency support mode. Although the game mode is shifted to the normal mode, the game mode may be shifted to either the normal mode or the special mode based on other conditions.

Further, in the present embodiment, the main control device 60 shifts the game mode from the special mode to the normal mode when a predetermined number of game times (30 times in the present embodiment) are exhausted after shifting the game mode to the special mode. Transition. According to this, since the player pays attention to the number of times the game is digested, the pachinko machine 10 can improve the player's attention to the game.
In the present embodiment, the main control device 60 shifts the game mode from the special mode to the normal mode when 30 game times have been completed after shifting the game mode to the special mode. However, other than this. The game mode may be shifted from the special mode to the normal mode when the number of game times is exhausted. For example, the number of times the game is digested is set by dividing it into a plurality of times such as 30 times and 50 times. You may do so.

Further, in the present embodiment, the main control device 60 shifts the game mode from the special mode to the normal mode when 30 game times have been completed after shifting the game mode to the special mode. As a result of the internal lottery conducted based on the winning of the upper operating port 36 or the lower operating port 37, when the number of "small hit wins" exceeds a predetermined number, the game mode is changed from the special mode to the normal mode. You may want to migrate.

Further, in the present embodiment, the main control device 60 shifts the game mode from the special mode to the normal mode when 30 game times have been completed after shifting the game mode to the special mode. When the game ball is fired toward the right-handed route, the game mode may be changed from the special mode to the normal mode. In other words, the main control device 60 may end the special mode as a penalty when the game ball is launched toward the right-handed route during the stay in the special mode. According to this, the player fires the game ball toward the right-handed route in the high-frequency support mode, and fires the game ball toward the left-handed route in the low-frequency support mode in the special mode. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can surely reflect the player's intention, and the player can comfortably play the game.

Further, in the present embodiment, the low-frequency support mode result functions as the first lottery result for shifting the gaming state to either the low-frequency support mode or the high-frequency support mode, and the high-frequency support mode result is the high-frequency support mode result. It functions as a second lottery result for shifting the game state to the support mode. According to this, the pachinko machine 10 can shift the gaming state to the high-frequency support mode even when the result of the low-frequency support mode is obtained, and the opportunity to shift the gaming state to the high-frequency support mode is increased. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can improve the player's attention to the game.
Then, in the low-frequency support mode, the game state is changed to the normal mode in which the game state is shifted to the low-frequency support mode when the result of the low-frequency support mode is obtained, and the game state is changed to the high-frequency support mode when the result of the low-frequency support mode is obtained. It has a special mode to shift. According to this, the player will play with the expectation that he / she will stay in the special mode even when the gaming state is shifted to the low frequency support mode. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 is the player. It is possible to improve the degree of attention to the game.

Further, in the present embodiment, the low-frequency support mode includes a normal mode and a special mode in which the probability of transitioning to a gaming state advantageous to the player is higher than that of the normal mode. Specifically, in the present embodiment, the special mode has a higher probability of shifting to the high frequency support mode than the normal mode. According to this, the player will play with the expectation that he / she will stay in the special mode even when the gaming state is shifted to the low frequency support mode. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 is the player. It is possible to improve the degree of attention to the game.
In the present embodiment, the special mode has a higher probability of shifting to the high frequency support mode than the normal mode and is 100%, but it does not have to be 100%. In short, the special mode only needs to have a higher probability of transitioning to the high frequency support mode than the normal mode.

Then, the main control device 60 changes from the normal control state to the opening / closing execution mode which is advantageous to the player, based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the upper operating port 36 and the lower operating port 37. When the state is changed and the game state is changed from the open / close execution mode to the normal control state, the game mode is changed to either the normal mode or the special mode.
In the present embodiment, when the main control device 60 shifts the game state from the open / close execution mode to the normal control state, the game mode shifts to either the normal mode or the special mode, but other than this. The game mode may be shifted to either the normal mode or the special mode at the timing. For example, the game mode may be shifted to either the normal mode or the special mode during the digestion of the game times.

<Electrical configuration of voice emission control device 90 and display control device 100>
FIG. 23 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the voice emission control device and the display control device.
As shown in FIG. 23, the voice emission control device 90 includes a voice emission control board 91, an MPU 92 mounted on the voice light emission control board 91, and a ROM 93 and a RAM 94 constituting the MPU 92. Here, the MPU 92 is an element in which a CPU, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, and the like are combined into a chip in addition to the ROM 93 and the RAM 94.

The ROM 93 is a memory for storing various control programs and fixed value data, and is a non-volatile storage means that does not require an external power supply for holding the stored information.
The RAM 94 is a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when executing a control program stored in the ROM 93, and is a volatile storage means that requires an external power supply for holding the stored information. Is. The RAM 94 has various areas such as a command list storage area 94a.

The MPU 92 includes an input port and an output port. The input port of the MPU 92 is connected to the main control device 60 as described above. Further, the input port of the MPU 92 is connected to the push button 25b. The output port of the MPU 92 is connected to various lamp units 23, 53 to 55, a speaker unit 24, and a display control device 100.
The MPU 92 executes drive control of various lamp units 23, 53 to 55 and the speaker unit 24 based on a command transmitted from the main control device 60.
Further, the MPU 92 transmits a command as a result of analyzing these commands to the display control device 100. The voice emission control device 90 is electrically connected to the display control device 100 via a connector unit (connection unit) provided with connectors at both ends of the signal line.

The display control device 100 includes a display control board 101, an MPU 102, a program ROM 103 and a work RAM 104 constituting the MPU 102, a video display processor (VDP) 105, a character ROM 106, and a video RAM 107. Here, the MPU 102 is an element in which a CPU, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, and the like are combined into a chip in addition to the program ROM 103 and the work RAM 104. The MPU 102, VDP 105, character ROM 106, and video RAM 107 are mounted on the display control board 101.

The MPU 102 analyzes a command transmitted from the voice emission control device 90, performs predetermined arithmetic processing based on this command, and executes control of the VDP 105. Specifically, the MPU 102 executes control of the VDP 105 by generating a command for the VDP 105.

The program ROM 103 is a memory for storing various control programs and fixed value data, and is a non-volatile storage means that does not require an external power supply for holding the stored information.
The work RAM 104 is a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when executing a control program stored in the program ROM 103, and is volatile that requires an external power supply for holding the stored information. It is a means of memory.

The VDP 105 is a kind of drawing circuit that directly operates an image processing device as a liquid crystal display unit driver incorporated in the symbol display device 51. Since the VDP 105 is made into an IC chip, it is also called a "drawing chip", and its substance can be said to be a microcomputer chip having a built-in firmware dedicated to drawing processing. The VDP 105 reads image data from the character ROM 106 based on the content of the command generated by the MPU 102, and stores the image data in the video RAM 107.

The character ROM 106 functions as an image data library for storing character data such as a symbol displayed on the symbol display device 51. The character ROM 106 holds bitmap format image data of various symbols, a color palette table to be referred to when determining the expression color of each dot of the bitmap image, and the like.
The video RAM 107 is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the symbol display device 51, and the display content of the symbol display device 51 is changed by rewriting the content of the video RAM 107.

<About timer interrupt processing executed by the voice emission control device 90>
FIG. 24 is a diagram showing a flowchart of timer interrupt processing executed by the voice emission control device.
The MPU 92 of the voice emission control device 90 executes a timer interrupt process for advancing the game. In this timer interrupt process, the MPU 92 periodically (for example, at a cycle of 2 msec) executes steps S2001 to S2005, as shown in FIG. 24.

In step S2001, the MPU 92 executes the command storage process. In this command storage process, when the MPU 92 receives a command from the MPU 62, the MPU 92 stores the command in the RAM 94. Specifically, the RAM 94 has a ring buffer for storing and reading commands received from the MPU 62, and the MPU 92 stores the commands in the ring buffer in the order received from the MPU 62. The MPU 92 reads commands from the ring buffer in the order stored in the ring buffer.

In step S2002, the MPU 92 executes the effect determination process based on the command received from the MPU 62. In the effect determination process, the MPU 92 determines the effect for the game round, the effect for the variable ball entry execution mode, the effect for the open / close execution mode, and the like.
In step S2003, the MPU 92 executes the effect execution process based on the content of the effect determination process in step S2002. Specifically, in the effect execution process, the MPU 92 executes light emission control of various lamp units 23, 53 to 55, and executes voice control of the speaker unit 24.

In step S2004, the MPU 92 executes the demo display execution process based on the demo command received from the MPU 62. In the demo display execution process, the MPU 92 executes the demo display when a predetermined start waiting period (for example, 3 sec) for starting the demo has elapsed without starting a new game round after the end of the game round. .. Specifically, in the demo display execution process, the MPU 92 executes light emission control of various lamp units 23, 53 to 55, and executes voice control of the speaker unit 24.

In step S2005, a command transmission process for transmitting the command set in the effect determination process of step S2002 and the demo display execution process of step S2004 to the display control device 100 is executed. In this command transmission process, the MPU 92 determines whether or not it is time to transmit various commands stored as a command list in the command list storage area 94a of the RAM 94 to the display control device 100, and transmits various commands to the display control device 100. When it is determined that the timing of transmission to is reached, the command is transmitted to the display control device 100.
After that, the MPU 92 ends the timer interrupt processing.

<Regarding the effect determination process executed by the voice emission control device 90>
FIG. 25 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the effect determination process.
The MPU 92 of the voice emission control device 90 executes the effect determination process in order to execute the effect for the game round, the effect for the variable input ball execution mode, the effect for the open / close execution mode, and the like. In this effect determination process, the MPU 92 executes steps S2101 to S2116 as shown in FIG.

In step S2101, the MPU 92 determines whether or not it has received the variation command and the type command transmitted from the MPU 62.
When the MPU 92 determines in step S2101 that each command has not been received, the MPU 92 executes the processes after step S2109.
On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines that each command has been received in step S2101, whether or not the winning / failing result is "big hit winning" in step S2102 based on the content of the type command. To judge.

When the MPU 92 determines in step S2102 that the winning / failing result is "big hit winning", the MPU 92 executes the processes after step S2103.
On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines in step S2102 that the winning / failing result is not "big hit winning", the MPU 92 executes the processes after step S2104.

First, in step S2102, a process when the MPU 92 determines that the winning / failing result is "big hit winning" (processing after step S2103) will be described.
In step S2103, the MPU 92 executes a symbol determination process for a jackpot. In this jackpot symbol determination process, when the MPU 92 determines that the distribution result is the "high frequency support mode result", the same odd number as the stop result to finally display the stop on the effective line L. When the information related to the combination of symbols having numbers is determined and the distribution result is determined to be the "low frequency support mode result", the same even number as the stop result to finally display the stop on the effective line L. Determine the information related to the combination of symbols having the numbers. The odd and even numbers are randomly determined by lottery or the like.

Next, in step S2102, a process when the MPU 92 determines that the winning / failing result is not "big hit winning" (processing after step S2104) will be described.
In step S2104, the MPU 92 determines whether or not the winning / failing result is "small hit winning" based on the content of the type command.

When the MPU 92 determines in step S2104 that the winning / failing result is "small hit winning", the MPU 92 executes a symbol determination process for small hits in step S2105. In this small hit symbol determination process, if a "small hit win" is obtained in the winning / failing lottery performed based on the winning of the upper operating port 36, the MPU 92 is finally stopped on the effective line L. As the stop result to be displayed, the information related to the combination of special symbols is determined. Specifically, the MPU 92 is not a combination of symbols having the same number, but a combination of special symbols having different numbers that are not selected when a "normally out-of-order result" is obtained in the winning / losing lottery (for example). "3.4.1") is decided. In the case of a "small hit winning" in the winning / failing lottery conducted based on the winning of the lower operating port 37, the MPU 92 has the same alphabetic character as the stop result of finally displaying the stop on the effective line L. Determine the information related to the combination of symbols.

On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines in step S2104 that the winning / failing result is not a "small hit winning" (when it is determined that the winning / failing result is a "normally out of order result"), the MPU 92 normally fails in step S2106. Executes the symbol determination process for. In this pattern determination process for normal deviation, the MPU 92 executes the variation display of the symbol based on the content of the variation command, triggered by winning a prize in which of the upper actuation port 36 and the lower actuation port 37. (Which of the first result display unit 45a and the second result display unit 45b is used to execute the variation display) is determined, and the reach display is generated based on the content of the variation command. Determine whether or not to do so.

The MPU 92 determines that the variable display of the pattern is executed triggered by the winning of the upper operating port 36, and when it is determined that the reach display occurs, the MPU 92 finally stops and displays the reach on the effective line L. Determine the information related to the combination of displayed symbols. The combination of the reach display symbols is randomly determined by lottery or the like.
On the other hand, when it is determined that the reach display does not occur, the MPU 92 determines the information related to the combination of symbols different from the combination of symbols described above as the stop result of finally displaying the stop on the effective line L. To do. Specifically, the MPU 92 randomly determines a combination of symbols having the same number, a combination of special symbols, and a combination of symbols different from any of the combinations of reach display symbols by lottery or the like.

Further, the MPU 92 determines that the variable display of the pattern is executed by triggering the winning of the lower operating port 37, and when it is determined that the reach display occurs, the stop result is finally stopped and displayed on the effective line L. The information related to the combination of the symbols of the reach display is determined as.
On the other hand, when it is determined that the reach display does not occur, the MPU 92 determines the information related to the combination of symbols different from the combination of symbols described above as the stop result of finally displaying the stop on the effective line L. To do. Specifically, the MPU 92 determines a combination of symbols having the same alphabetic character and a combination of symbols different from the combination of the symbols of the reach display.

After executing the process of step S2103, step S2105, or step S2106, the MPU 92 executes the effect pattern determination process in step S2107. In this effect pattern determination process, the MPU 92 selects an effect pattern corresponding to the variation command and the type command by referring to the effect table stored in advance in the ROM 93. Specifically, the MPU 92 selects the effect duration (effect duration) and the content of the effect as the effect pattern. In step S2107, the MPU 92 also executes a lottery as to whether or not to generate a notice display.

Here, in the low frequency support mode of the special mode, when the MPU 92 becomes a "small hit winning" as a result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning of the upper operating port 36 or the lower operating port 37, Before the variable display of the symbol display device 51 is completed, a character is displayed on the display screen G, and a pre-notification effect is executed to notify the player to hit right with the dialogue of this character. Specifically, the MPU 92 executes the advance notification effect 5 seconds before the end of the variation display of the symbol display device 51. According to this, the player starts right-handed striking after confirming the advance notification effect so that the game ball reaches the right-side variable entry mechanism 40 before setting the blade member 401a in the open state in the MPU 62. Can be done. In other words, the game ball can reach the right variable ball entry mechanism 40 within 5 seconds after being launched from the game ball launch mechanism 81.

As described above, in the present embodiment, in the low frequency support mode of the special mode, when the result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning of the upper operating port 36 or the lower operating port 37 is "small hit winning". The player can enter the game ball into the right-side variable ball entry mechanism 40 by starting right-handed hitting after confirming the advance notification effect.
Here, as described above, in the low frequency support mode, the game ball has a higher probability of winning the upper operating port 36 than the lower operating port 37, and in the high frequency support mode, the game ball has the upper operating port 36. The probability of winning a prize in the lower operating port 37 is higher than that. Then, based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the lower operating port 37, the probability of shifting to the open / close execution mode via the variable entry execution mode (about 1 / 12.5) is determined. It is higher than the probability (about 1/60) of shifting to the open / close execution mode via the variable entry execution mode based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the upper operating port 36. ..

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the high-frequency support mode functions as a first time-saving state that facilitates entry into the right-side variable entry mechanism 40. The low frequency support mode of the special mode functions as a second time saving state in which it is difficult to enter the right variable ball entry mechanism 40 as compared with the high frequency support mode. According to this, it is possible to diversify the types of game states in which the game state can be shifted from the normal control state to the open / close execution mode when the game ball enters the right variable ball entry mechanism 40. 10 can improve the player's attention to the game.

On the other hand, in the low frequency support mode of the normal mode, when the MPU 92 becomes a "small hit winning" as a result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning of the upper operating port 36 or the lower operating port 37. Is designed not to execute the advance notification effect.

As described above, in the present embodiment, in the low frequency support mode of the normal mode, when the result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning of the upper operating port 36 or the lower operating port 37 is "small hit winning". Since the player cannot confirm the advance notification effect, the player cannot enter the game ball into the right variable ball entry mechanism 40. In other words, the low frequency support mode of the normal mode cannot enter the right variable ball entry mechanism 40.

Further, in the present embodiment, in the high frequency support mode, the game ball has a higher probability of winning the lower operating port 37 than the upper operating port 36. Therefore, in the high frequency support mode, the game ball is directed toward the right-handed route. By firing, it functions as a first time saving state that is advantageous for the player. In the low frequency support mode of the special mode, the game ball has a higher probability of winning the upper operating port 36 than the lower operating port 37. Therefore, in the low frequency support mode of the special mode, the game ball is moved toward the right-handed route. By firing, it functions as a second time saving state, which is a disadvantageous situation for the player as compared with the high frequency support mode. In other words, the low frequency support mode of the special mode is advantageous for the player by firing the game ball toward the left-handed route. According to this, it is possible to diversify the types of gaming states in which the gaming state can be shifted from the normal control state to the specific control state when the gaming ball enters the right variable entry mechanism 40, so that the pachinko machine can be used. 10 can improve the player's attention to the game.

In the present embodiment, the first time saving state has a higher probability of winning the lower operating port 37 than the upper operating port 36, and the second time saving state has a higher operating port 36 than the lower operating port 37. By increasing the probability of winning, it created favorable and unfavorable situations for the player. On the other hand, the first time saving state shortens the display duration of the variation display based on the winning of the lower operating port 37, and the second time saving state is the variation based on the winning of the lower operating port 37. By increasing the display duration of the display, it is possible to create favorable and unfavorable situations for the player.

Further, the MPU 92 executes the light emission control of the indicator lamp unit 23 and the voice control of the speaker unit 24 in the effect execution process of step S2003 described above based on the selected effect pattern.

In step S2108, the MPU 92 sets a stop result command including information related to the stop result determined in the process of step S2103, step S2105, or step S2106, and a pattern command including the effect pattern selected in step S2107. Then, the MPU 92 stores the stop result command and the pattern command in the command list stored in the command list storage area 94a of the RAM 94. These stop result commands and pattern commands are transmitted to the display control device 100 in the command transmission process of step S2005 described above.

The MPU 102 of the display control device 100 reads from the program ROM 103 a data table for executing the effect for the game round on the symbol display device 51 based on the stop result command and the pattern command transmitted from the MPU 92. Then, the MPU 102 outputs a command to the VDP 105 based on this data table every time the predetermined image update timing (for example, 20 msec cycle) is reached. As a result, the symbol display device 51 executes the effect for the game round based on the effect pattern selected by the MPU 92 of the voice emission control device 90, and finally puts the stop result determined by the MPU 92 on the effective line L. Stop display.

After executing the process of step S2108, or when it is determined in step S2101 that the change command and the type command have not been received, the MPU 92 executes the processes of step S2109 and subsequent steps.
In step S2109, the MPU 92 determines whether or not the command for the variable ball entry execution mode (blade member opening command, V winning success command, or V winning failure command) transmitted from the MPU 62 has been received.

When the MPU 92 determines in step S2109 that the command for the variable ball entry execution mode has not been received, the MPU 92 executes the processes after step S2112.
On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines that the command for the variable ball entry execution mode has been received in step S2109, the MPU 92 executes the determination process of the effect for the variable ball entry execution mode in step S2110. In the process of determining the effect for the variable ball entry execution mode, when the MPU 92 determines that the blade member release command has been received in step S2109, the MPU 92 refers to the table for the effect stored in advance in the ROM 93. An effect pattern corresponding to the opening of the blade member 401a is selected. Further, when the MPU 92 determines that the V prize success command has been received in step S2109, the MPU 92 selects the effect pattern corresponding to the success of the V prize by referring to the effect table stored in advance in the ROM 93. Then, when it is determined in step S2109 that the V winning failure command has been received, the production pattern corresponding to the V winning failure is selected by referring to the effect table stored in advance in the ROM 93.

In step S2111, the MPU 92 sets a command for the variable ball entry execution mode including the effect for the variable ball entry execution mode selected in step S2110. Then, the MPU 92 stores the command for the variable input ball execution mode in the command list stored in the command list storage area 94a of the RAM 94. The command for the variable ball entry execution mode is transmitted to the display control device 100 in the command transmission process in step S2005 described above.

The MPU 102 of the display control device 100 is based on the command for the variable ball entry execution mode transmitted from the MPU 92, and the effect for the variable ball entry execution mode (opening of the blade member 401a, success of V winning, or failure of V winning). The data table for executing the effect) corresponding to the symbol display device 51 is read from the program ROM 103. Then, the MPU 102 outputs a command to the VDP 105 based on this data table every time the predetermined image update timing (for example, 20 msec cycle) is reached. As a result, the symbol display device 51 executes the effect for the variable ball entry execution mode, and notifies the player that the blade member 401a has been opened, that the V winning has been successful, or that the V winning has failed.

After executing the process of step S2111, or when it is determined in step S2109 that the command for the variable ball entry execution mode has not been received, the MPU 92 executes the processes after step S2112.
In step S2112, the MPU 92 determines whether or not the opening command has been received.

When the MPU 92 determines in step S2112 that the opening command has not been received, the MPU 92 executes the processes after step S2116.
On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines that the opening command has been received in step S2112, the MPU 92 determines the type of distribution result based on the content of the opening command in step S2113.

In step S2114, the MPU 92 executes the effect determination process for the open / close execution mode corresponding to the type of distribution result determined in step S2113.

FIG. 26 is a diagram showing a flowchart of an effect determination process for the open / close execution mode.
The MPU 92 of the voice emission control device 90 executes the effect determination process for the open / close execution mode in order to determine the effect for the open / close execution mode. In the effect determination process for the open / close execution mode, the MPU 92 executes steps S2201 to S2204 as shown in FIG.

In step S2201, the MPU 92 determines whether or not the distribution result determined in step S2113 is the “high frequency support mode result”.
When the MPU 92 determines in step S2201 that the game result is the "high frequency support mode result", the MPU 92 selects the effect A as the effect for the open / close execution mode in step S2202. After that, the MPU 62 ends the effect determination process for the open / close execution mode.
On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines in step S2201 that the distribution result is not the "high frequency support mode result" (when the distribution result is determined to be the "low frequency support mode result"), the MPU 92 determines. In step S2203, based on the content of the opening command, it is determined whether or not the game mode when the "big hit win" is obtained in the winning / losing lottery is the special mode.

When the MPU 92 determines in step S2203 that the game mode is a special mode, the MPU 92 executes the processes after step S2202 described above, and selects the effect A as the effect for the open / close execution mode. After that, the MPU 62 ends the effect determination process for the open / close execution mode.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step S2203 that the game mode is not the special mode (when it is determined that the game mode is the normal mode), the MPU 92 is produced as an effect for the open / close execution mode in step S2204. Select B. After that, the MPU 62 ends the effect determination process for the open / close execution mode.
The duration of the effect A and the effect B corresponds to the time when the large winning opening 38a is opened and closed 15 times in the open / close execution mode.

Further, the MPU 92 executes the light emission control of the indicator lamp unit 23 and the voice control of the speaker unit 24 in the effect execution process of step S2003 described above based on the selection results of the effect A and the effect B.

Returning to the description of the effect determination process, the processes after step S2115 will be described with reference to FIG. 25.
In step S2115, the MPU 92 sets a command for the open / close execution mode including information related to the effect for the open / close execution mode selected in step S2114. This open / close execution mode command is transmitted to the display control device 100 in the command transmission process in step S2005 described above.

The MPU 102 of the display control device 100 reads from the program ROM 103 a data table for executing the effect for the open / close execution mode on the symbol display device 51 based on the open / close execution mode command transmitted from the MPU 92. Then, the MPU 102 outputs a command to the VDP 105 based on this data table every time the predetermined image update timing (for example, 20 msec cycle) is reached. As a result, the symbol display device 51 executes the effect for the open / close execution mode selected by the MPU 92 of the voice emission control device 90.

After executing the process of step S2115, or when it is determined in step S2112 that the opening command has not been received, the MPU 92 executes the processes of step S2116 and subsequent steps.
In step S2116, the MPU 92 executes other processing. In other processes, the MPU 92 executes a process for advancing the effect for the open / close execution mode based on, for example, an open command, a close command, an ending command, or the like transmitted from the MPU 62. After that, the MPU 92 ends the effect determination process.

<Relationship between game results and game status>
Hereinafter, the relationship between the game result and the game state based on the execution of various processes will be described.
FIG. 27 is a diagram showing the relationship between the game result and the game state and the like. Specifically, FIG. 27 is a diagram showing the relationship between the game result excluding the “normal deviation result” and the game state, and the game results are arranged in the column direction and the game state and the like are arranged in the row direction.
As shown in FIG. 27, the pachinko machine 10 has a game mode of a normal mode and a special mode. In addition, the pachinko machine 10 has a distribution result of "high frequency support mode result" and "low frequency support mode result" as game results excluding "normal deviation result".

Hereinafter, the relationship between the game result excluding the “normal deviation result” and the game state and the like will be described. In the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 sets the relationship between the game result and the game state as follows, but the combination of the game result and the game state, the content of the game result, and the game state, etc. The contents such as the game state are arbitrary.

In the game mode of the normal mode, the contents of the game state and the like differ depending on the game results of the "high frequency support mode result" and the "low frequency support mode result".
Specifically, in the "high frequency support mode result", the opening and closing of the large winning opening 38a is executed 15 times. Further, in the "high frequency support mode result" based on the winning of the upper operating port 36, the stop result is a combination of symbols having the same odd number, and the effect for the open / close execution mode is effect A. .. In the "high frequency support mode result" based on the winning of the lower operating port 37, the stop result is a combination of symbols having the same alphabetic character, and the effect for the open / close execution mode is effect A. Further, in the "high frequency support mode result", the support mode shifts to the high frequency support mode. Then, the next game mode will be the normal mode.

Further, in the "low frequency support mode result", the opening and closing of the large winning opening 38a is executed 15 times. Further, in the "low frequency support mode result" based on the winning of the upper operating port 36, the stop result is a combination of symbols having the same even number, and the effect for the open / close execution mode is effect B. .. In the "low frequency support mode result" based on the winning of the lower operating port 37, the stop result is a combination of symbols having the same alphabetic character, and the effect for the open / close execution mode is effect B. Further, in the "low frequency support mode result", the support mode shifts to the low frequency support mode. Then, the next game mode will be the "special mode".

On the other hand, in the game mode of the "special mode", the contents of the game state and the like are the same regardless of the game results of the "high frequency support mode result" and the "low frequency support mode result".
Specifically, the opening and closing of the grand prize opening 38a is executed 15 times. Further, in the game result based on the winning of the upper operating port 36, the stop result is a combination of symbols having the same number, and the effect for the open / close execution mode is the effect A. Further, the support mode shifts to the high frequency support mode. Then, the next game mode will be the normal mode.

Therefore, the player can grasp that the distribution result is the "high frequency support mode result" or the "low frequency support mode result" by checking the stop result and the effect for the open / close execution mode. It is possible to know that the next game mode is the normal mode or the special mode.

<About the entry of the game ball into the right variable entry mechanism and the subsequent flow>
FIG. 28 is a diagram showing an effect for game rotation when a game ball wins a prize in the lower operating port triggered by winning a prize in the through gate in the high frequency support mode.
In addition, the high-frequency support mode becomes "big win" or "small win" in the winning / failing lottery, and is assigned to the "high-frequency support mode result" in the sorting lottery, or wins / loses during the stay in the special mode. It shifts to the case where it becomes a "big hit" in the lottery and is distributed to the "low frequency support mode result" in the distribution lottery. Further, FIG. 28 is a diagram showing a display screen G of the symbol display device 51 when the winning / failing result is “small hit winning”.

First, the MPU 102 starts the variable display of the plurality of symbol strings Z1 to Z3 (see FIG. 4B) displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 51 based on the pattern command received from the MPU 92. Shifts to a high-speed fluctuation period. In this high-speed fluctuation period, the MPU 102 starts the fluctuation display of the symbols by periodically scrolling the symbols of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction (upward in the present embodiment). Further, the MPU 102 displays the symbol display device 51 by setting the value of the game count counter RTC as the remaining number of times (55 times in FIG. 28A) up to the end reference number of the high frequency support mode based on the content of the variation command. Displayed in the upper left of screen G. Further, in the high frequency support mode, the MPU 102 displays a right-pointing arrow at the upper right of the display screen G of the symbol display device 51 in order to suggest the player to hit right.
After the lapse of the high-speed fluctuation period, the MPU 102 displays a part of the symbol rows (symbol row Z1 and symbol row Z3) stopped on the effective line L (see FIG. 4 (B)) as shown in FIG. 28 (A). By causing the same symbol combination (“A” in the present embodiment) to be displayed to suggest a stop result, and the remaining symbol sequence (symbol sequence Z2) is variablely displayed in that state, the reach display is displayed. Generate and shift to the reach period.

After that, based on the stop result command received from the MPU 92, as shown in FIG. 28 (B), the MPU 102 enables a combination of symbols having the same alphabetic characters (“AAA” in the present embodiment) as the stop result. By displaying the stop on L, the result of the winning / failing lottery is notified.

After the combination of symbols having the same alphabetic characters is stopped and displayed on the effective line L by the MPU 102, the MPU 62 executes the drive control of the blade member driving unit 401c as shown in FIG. 28 (C). The blade member 401a is set to the open state.
Further, the MPU 102 generates an effect for notifying the player of the opening of the blade member based on the blade member opening command received from the MPU 92. Specifically, the MPU 102 displays a character on the entire surface of the display screen G of the symbol display device 51, and notifies the player to hit right with the dialogue of this character.

Then, the MPU 102 executes the effect for the variable ball entry execution mode as shown in FIGS. 28 (D) and 28 (E) based on the command for the variable ball entry execution mode received from the MPU 92.
In the production for the variable ball entry execution mode, the MPU 102 is based on the V winning success command received from the MPU 92 when the game ball wins (V winning) in the right ball entry port 404 in the variable ball entry execution mode. As shown in FIG. 28 (D), the effect corresponding to the success of the V prize is executed. Specifically, the MPU 102 displays the character "V" on the entire surface of the display screen G of the symbol display device 51, and notifies the player that the game ball has won a prize (V prize) at the right entry port 404. ..
Further, in the production for the variable ball entry execution mode, the MPU 102 is based on the V winning failure command received from the MPU 92 when the game ball does not win a prize (V winning) in the right entry port 404 (FIG. 28). As shown in E), the effect corresponding to the failure of the V prize is executed. Specifically, the MPU 102 displays the character "sorry" on the entire surface of the display screen G of the symbol display device 51, and informs the player that the game ball did not win (V prize) at the right entry port 404. Notify.

FIG. 29 is an enlarged view showing the periphery of the right variable ball entry mechanism.
The MPU 62 stops and displays a combination of symbols having the same alphabetic characters on the effective line L on the MPU 102, and then controls the drive of the blade member driving unit 401c as shown in FIGS. 28 (C) and 29 (A). By executing the above, the blade member 401a is set to the open state (see the arrow in the figure).

After setting the blade member 401a to the open state, the MPU 62 sets the plate 403a to the open state by executing the drive control of the plate drive unit 403c as shown in FIG. 29 (B) when 1 sec has elapsed. After setting (see the arrow in the figure) and a predetermined time (0.2 sec in this embodiment) elapses, the plate 403a is set to the closed state (see the arrow in FIG. 29 (C)).
Then, the MPU 62 is shown in FIG. 29 (C) when a game ball wins a prize (V prize) in the right entry port 404, or when 2 sec elapses after setting the blade member 401a to the open state. By executing the drive control of the blade member driving unit 401c, the blade member 401a is set to the closed state (see the arrow in the figure).

FIG. 30 is a diagram showing an effect for the opening / closing execution mode when a game ball wins a prize (V prize) at the right entrance.
The MPU 102 corresponds to the success of the V winning as shown in FIGS. 28 (D) and 30 (A) when the game ball wins (V winning) in the right entrance 404 in the variable ball entry execution mode. Perform the production to be done. After that, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the open / close execution mode.

In the effect determination process for the open / close execution mode, the MPU 92 determines in step S2201 that the game result is the "high frequency support mode result", or in step S2203 that the game mode is the special mode. In this case, in step S2202, the effect A is selected as the effect for the open / close execution mode. In this effect A, as shown in FIG. 30B, the MPU 102 displays a character on the display screen G of the symbol display device 51 at the end of the open / close execution mode, and at the same time, the line “RUSH rush!” Of this character is displayed. The player is notified that the game result is the "high frequency support mode result".

After that, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the high frequency support mode as shown in FIG. 30 (C). In the high frequency support mode, the game mode shifts to the normal mode. In the high-frequency support mode, the MPU 102 displays the value of the game count counter RTC as the remaining number of times up to the end reference number of the high-frequency support mode (100 times in FIG. 30 (C)) based on the content of the variable command. It is displayed on the upper left of the display screen G of the device 51. Further, in the high frequency support mode, the MPU 102 displays a right-pointing arrow at the upper right of the display screen G of the symbol display device 51 in order to suggest the player to hit right.

On the other hand, in the effect determination process for the open / close execution mode, the MPU 92 determines in step S2201 that the game result is not the "high frequency support mode result", and in step S2203 that the game mode is not the special mode. If this is the case (when it is determined that the game mode is the normal mode), in step S2204, the effect B is selected as the effect for the open / close execution mode. In this effect B, as shown in FIG. 30 (D), the MPU 102 displays a character on the display screen G of the symbol display device 51 at the end of the open / close execution mode, and at the same time, the dialogue of this character "30 rotation chance zone. "!" Notifies the player that the game result is "low frequency support mode result" (shifting to the special mode).

After that, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the low frequency support mode as shown in FIG. 30 (E). In the low frequency support mode, the game mode stays in the special mode until 30 game times are exhausted, and then shifts to the normal mode. In the special mode, the MPU 102 displays the symbol display device 51 with the value of the game count counter RTC as the remaining number of times up to the end reference number of the special mode (30 times in FIG. 30 (E)) based on the content of the variation command. Displayed in the upper left of screen G. Further, in the low frequency support mode of the special mode, the MPU 102 displays a left-pointing arrow at the upper right of the display screen G of the symbol display device 51 in order to suggest a left-handed strike to the player.
In the present embodiment, the remaining number of times up to the end reference number of times of the special mode is displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 51, but this may not be displayed.

FIG. 31 is a diagram showing an effect for playing a game when staying in the special mode.
In the special mode, the MPU 102 starts variable display of a plurality of symbol strings Z1 to Z3 (see FIG. 4A) displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 51 based on the pattern command received from the MPU 92. By doing so, it shifts to a high-speed fluctuation period. In this high-speed fluctuation period, the MPU 102 starts the fluctuation display of the symbols by periodically scrolling the symbols of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction (upward in the present embodiment). Further, the MPU 102 sets the value of the game count counter RTC as the remaining number of times up to the end reference number of the special mode (15 times in FIG. 31A) based on the content of the variation command, and sets the display screen G of the symbol display device 51. It is displayed in the upper left of. Further, in the low frequency support mode of the special mode, the MPU 102 displays a left-pointing arrow at the upper right of the display screen G of the symbol display device 51 in order to suggest a left-handed strike to the player.
In the present embodiment, the remaining number of times up to the end reference number of times of the special mode is displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 51, but this may not be displayed.

After the lapse of the high-speed fluctuation period, the MPU 102 stops and displays some of the symbol rows (symbol row Z1 and symbol row Z3) on the effective line L (see FIG. 4 (A)), thereby causing the same combination of symbols (see FIG. 4 (A)). In the present embodiment, "2") is displayed to indicate the stop result, and the remaining symbol sequence (symbol sequence Z2) is variablely displayed in that state to generate the reach display and shift to the reach period.

After that, based on the stop result command received from the MPU 92, the MPU 102 enables a combination of symbols having the same number (“222” in the present embodiment) as the stop result, as shown in FIG. 31 (B). By displaying the stop on L, the result of the winning / failing lottery is notified. After that, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the open / close execution mode.

In the effect determination process for the open / close execution mode, the MPU 92 determines in step S2201 that the game result is the "high frequency support mode result", or in step S2203 that the game mode is the special mode. In this case, in step S2202, the effect A is selected as the effect for the open / close execution mode. In other words, in the special mode, the effect A is selected as the effect for the open / close execution mode regardless of the content of the game result. In this effect A, as shown in FIG. 31C, the MPU 102 displays a character on the display screen G of the symbol display device 51 at the end of the open / close execution mode, and at the same time, the line “RUSH rush!” Of this character is displayed. The player is notified that the game result is the "high frequency support mode result".

After that, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the high frequency support mode. In the high frequency support mode, the game mode shifts to the normal mode. In the high-frequency support mode, the MPU 102 displays the value of the game count counter RTC as the remaining number of times up to the end reference number of the high-frequency support mode (100 times in FIG. 31 (C)) based on the content of the variable command. It is displayed on the upper left of the display screen G of the device 51. Further, in the high frequency support mode, the MPU 102 displays a right-pointing arrow at the upper right of the display screen G of the symbol display device 51 in order to suggest the player to hit right.

In addition, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the normal mode as shown in FIG. 31 (D) when the pachinko machine 10 has completed 30 game rounds without becoming a "big hit win" in the winning / losing lottery.

In the normal mode, the MPU 102 starts variable display of a plurality of symbol strings Z1 to Z3 (see FIG. 4A) displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 51 based on the pattern command received from the MPU 92. By doing so, it shifts to a high-speed fluctuation period. In this high-speed fluctuation period, the MPU 102 starts the fluctuation display of the symbols by periodically scrolling the symbols of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction (upward in the present embodiment).
After the lapse of the high-speed fluctuation period, the MPU 102 stops and displays some of the symbol rows (symbol row Z1 and symbol row Z3) on the effective line L (see FIG. 4 (A)) to display the same combination of symbols. By displaying and suggesting the stop result and displaying the remaining symbol sequence (symbol sequence Z2) in a variable manner in that state, the reach display is generated and the reach period is entered.

After that, the MPU 102 notifies the result of the winning / failing lottery by stopping and displaying a combination of symbols having the same number on the effective line L as the stop result based on the stop result command received from the MPU 92. After that, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the open / close execution mode.

In the process of determining the effect for the open / close execution mode, when the MPU 92 determines in step S2201 that the game result is the "high frequency support mode result", in step S2202, the effect A is performed as the effect for the open / close execution mode. Select. In this effect A, as shown in FIG. 31C, the MPU 102 displays a character on the display screen G of the symbol display device 51 at the end of the open / close execution mode, and at the same time, the line “RUSH rush!” Of this character is displayed. The player is notified that the game result is the "high frequency support mode result".

After that, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the high frequency support mode. In the high frequency support mode, the game mode shifts to the normal mode. In the high-frequency support mode, the MPU 102 displays the value of the game count counter RTC as the remaining number of times up to the end reference number of the high-frequency support mode (100 times in FIG. 31 (C)) based on the content of the variable command. It is displayed on the upper left of the display screen G of the device 51. Further, in the high frequency support mode, the MPU 102 displays a right-pointing arrow at the upper right of the display screen G of the symbol display device 51 in order to suggest the player to hit right.

On the other hand, in the effect determination process for the open / close execution mode, the MPU 92 determines in step S2201 that the game result is not the "high frequency support mode result", and in step S2203 that the game mode is not the special mode. If this is the case (when it is determined that the game mode is the normal mode), in step S2204, the effect B is selected as the effect for the open / close execution mode. In this effect B, as shown in FIG. 31 (E), the MPU 102 displays a character on the display screen G of the symbol display device 51 at the end of the open / close execution mode, and at the same time, the dialogue “30 rotation chance zone” of this character. "!" Notifies the player that the game result is "low frequency support mode result" (shifting to the special mode).

After that, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the low frequency support mode. In the low frequency support mode, the game mode stays in the special mode until 30 game times are exhausted, and then shifts to the normal mode. In the special mode, the MPU 102 displays the symbol display device 51 with the value of the game count counter RTC as the remaining number of times up to the end reference number of the special mode (30 times in FIG. 31 (E)) based on the content of the variation command. Displayed in the upper left of screen G. Further, in the low frequency support mode of the special mode, the MPU 102 displays a left-pointing arrow at the upper right of the display screen G of the symbol display device 51 in order to suggest a left-handed strike to the player.
In the present embodiment, the remaining number of times up to the end reference number of times of the special mode is displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 51, but this may not be displayed.

According to such an embodiment, the following actions and effects can be obtained.
(1) In the normal mode and the high frequency support mode of the low frequency support mode, the main control device 60 shifts the gaming state to either the low frequency support mode or the high frequency support mode based on the result of the internal lottery. In the special mode of the low frequency support mode, the game state is shifted to the high frequency support mode regardless of the result of the internal lottery, so that the player can switch to the special mode even if the game state is shifted to the low frequency support mode. You will play with the expectation that you are staying. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can improve the player's attention to the game.

(2) When the main control device 60 shifts the gaming state from the open / close execution mode to the normal control state, the game state shifts to either the low frequency support mode or the high frequency support mode, so that the player is low. When shifting to the frequency support mode, it will be important to pay attention to whether or not the user is in the special mode. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can improve the player's attention to the game.
(3) In the low frequency support mode, the probability of entering the upper operating port 36 is higher than that of the lower operating port 37, and in the high frequency support mode, the probability of entering the lower operating port 37 is higher than that of the upper operating port 36. Therefore, in the low frequency support mode, the player shoots the game ball aiming at the upper operating port 36, and in the high frequency support mode, the player shoots the game ball aiming at the lower operating port 37. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can clearly suggest the low frequency support mode and the high frequency support mode to the player.

(4) Based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the lower operating port 37, the probability of shifting to the open / close execution mode is executed when the game ball enters the upper operating port 36. Since it is higher than the probability of shifting to the open / close execution mode based on the result of the internal lottery, the player expects to shift the gaming state to the high frequency support mode. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can improve the player's attention to the game.
(5) The main control device 60 shifts the game mode to either the normal mode or the special mode based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the upper operating port 36 and the lower operating port 37. Therefore, the player pays attention to the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the upper operating port 36 and the lower operating port 37. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can improve the player's attention to the game.

(6) Since the main control device 60 shifts the game mode from the special mode to the normal mode when the game mode has been changed to the special mode and 30 times have been played, the player can digest the game times. You will pay attention to the number of times. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can improve the player's attention to the game.
(7) The results of the internal lottery are the low-frequency support mode result of shifting the gaming state to either the low-frequency support mode or the high-frequency support mode, and the high-frequency support mode result of shifting the gaming state to the high-frequency support mode. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can shift the gaming state to the high-frequency support mode even when the result of the low-frequency support mode is obtained, and has an opportunity to shift the gaming state to the high-frequency support mode. Can be increased. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can improve the player's attention to the game.

(8) The low-frequency support mode is a normal mode in which the game state is shifted to the low-frequency support mode when the low-frequency support mode result is obtained, and the game state is changed to the high-frequency support mode when the low-frequency support mode result is obtained. Since it has a special mode for shifting to, the player will play with the expectation that he / she will stay in the special mode even when the gaming state is shifted to the low frequency support mode. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can improve the player's attention to the game.
(9) The low-frequency support mode includes a normal mode and a special mode in which the probability of transitioning to a gaming state advantageous to the player is higher than that of the normal mode. When the transition is made, the game mode is changed to the special mode, and when the game state is changed to the high-frequency support mode, the game mode is changed to the normal mode. Therefore, the player shifts the game state to the low-frequency support mode. Even if you do, you will play with the expectation that you are staying in the special mode. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can improve the player's attention to the game.

(10) The game state is a high frequency support mode that makes it easier to enter the right variable ball entry mechanism 40 and a special mode that makes it difficult to enter the right variable ball entry mechanism 40 as compared with the high frequency support mode. Since it is equipped with a support mode, it is possible to diversify the types of game states in which the game state can be shifted from the normal control state to the open / close execution mode when the game ball enters the right variable ball entry mechanism 40. .. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can improve the player's attention to the game.
(11) The gaming state is high by launching the game ball toward the right-handed route and in the high-frequency support mode, which is advantageous for the player, and by launching the game ball toward the right-handed route. Since it has a low frequency support mode, which is a special mode that is disadvantageous for the player compared to the frequency support mode, the open / close execution mode is performed from the normal control state when the game ball enters the right variable ball entry mechanism 40. It is possible to diversify the types of gaming states that can shift the gaming state to. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can improve the player's attention to the game.

[Second Embodiment]
Hereinafter, a second embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.
In the following description, the parts already described will be designated by the same reference numerals and the description thereof will be omitted.

In the first embodiment, when the winning / losing lottery results in "big hit winning" and the special mode flag is set in the RAM 64, the gaming state is the open / close execution mode (that is, the round number specified mode) regardless of the current gaming state. ), The mode was changed to the special mode. Specifically, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1101 that the distribution result is not the "high frequency support mode result" and then determines in step S1105 that the special mode flag is not set in the RAM 64 (game mode). Is the normal mode), the special mode flag is set in the RAM 64 in step S1107. In other words, in the first embodiment, when the MPU 62 shifts to the low frequency support mode after the end of the open / close execution mode, it always shifts to the special mode.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when the MPU 62 shifts to the low frequency support mode after the end of the open / close execution mode, the MPU 62 executes a lottery as to whether or not to shift to the special mode, and wins this lottery. In this case, it differs from the first embodiment in that it shifts to the special mode.

In the present embodiment, the main control device 60 executes a process different from that of the first embodiment. Specifically, in the present embodiment, the transition process at the end of the open / close execution mode is different from that of the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the content of the transition process at the end of the open / close execution mode in the present embodiment will be described.

FIG. 32 is a diagram showing a flowchart of a transition process at the end of the opening / closing execution mode according to the second embodiment of the present invention.
In the transition process at the end of the open / close execution mode, the MPU 62 executes steps S1101 to S1113A as shown in FIG.
In step S1101, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the distribution result is a “high frequency support mode result”.

When the MPU 62 determines in step S1101 that the distribution result is the "high frequency support mode result", the MPU 62 executes the processes after step S1102.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1101 that the distribution result is not the "high frequency support mode result" (when the distribution result is determined to be the "low frequency support mode result"), the MPU 62 determines. The processing after step S1105 is executed.
First, in step S1101, the process when the MPU 62 determines that the distribution result is the “high frequency support mode result” (processes after step S1102) will be described.

In step S1102, the MPU 62 sets the high frequency support flag in the RAM 64. The MPU 62 maintains the high frequency support flag if it has already been set in the RAM 64. As a result, the MPU 62 sets the support mode to the high frequency support mode.
In step S1103, the special mode flag stored in the RAM 64 is cleared.

Here, the pachinko machine 10 has a plurality of game modes having different support modes, which are shifted after the opening / closing execution mode is completed. Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 has a normal mode in which the support mode is set after the opening / closing execution mode ends according to the distribution results of the "low frequency support mode result" and the "high frequency support mode result", and a "low frequency support". Regardless of the distribution result of "mode result" and "high frequency support mode result", the game mode has a special mode in which the support mode is set to the high frequency support mode after the opening / closing execution mode ends.

The special mode flag is a flag for specifying which game mode is the normal mode or the special mode. In step S1103, since the MPU 62 has cleared the special mode flag, the game mode is set to the normal mode.

In step S1104, the MPU 62 sets “100” to the value of the game count counter RTC provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64. After that, the MPU 62 ends the transition process at the end of the open / close execution mode.
Here, when the high-frequency support flag is set in the RAM 64, the high-frequency support mode continues until 100 game times, which is the end reference number set in the game number counter RTC, is exhausted. The MPU 62 clears the high frequency support flag when 100 game times have been completed. As a result, the MPU 62 sets the support mode to the low frequency support mode.

Next, in step S1101, the process when the MPU 62 determines that the distribution result is not the “high frequency support mode result” (processes after step S1105) will be described.
When the distribution result is determined not to be the "high frequency support mode result" in step S1101 (when the distribution result is determined to be the "low frequency support mode result"), the MPU 62 is determined in step S1105. It is determined whether or not the special mode flag is set in the RAM 64.

When the MPU 62 determines in step S1105 that the special mode flag is set in the RAM 64 (when it is determined that the game mode is the special mode), the MPU 62 executes the processes after step S1102 described above. In other words, when the game mode is a special mode, the MPU 62 frequently switches to the support mode after the opening / closing execution mode ends regardless of the distribution results of the "low frequency support mode result" and the "high frequency support mode result". Set to support mode.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step S1105 that the special mode flag is not set in the RAM 64 (when it is determined that the game mode is the normal mode), the MPU 62 is stored in the RAM 64 in step S1106. Clear the high frequency support flag. As a result, the MPU 62 sets the support mode to the low frequency support mode.

In step S1109A, the MPU 62 executes a special mode lottery process. Specifically, in the lottery process of the special mode, the MPU 62 executes a lottery as to whether or not to shift to the special mode with a predetermined probability (1/8 in the present embodiment) after the end of the open / close execution mode.

In the present embodiment, the MPU 62 has a probability of shifting to the special mode of 1/8, but it may be larger than 1/8 or smaller than 1/8. Further, the MPU 62 lowers the probability of shifting to the special mode when, for example, the number of game times digested before becoming a "big hit" in the winning / losing lottery is less than a predetermined number, and the "big hit" in the winning / losing lottery. If the number of game times digested before becoming "winning" is greater than the predetermined number, the probability of shifting to the special mode may be increased, and the probability of shifting to the special mode depending on other game situations may be increased. It may be varied.

In step S1110A, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the special mode lottery has been won.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S1110A that the lottery in the special mode has been won, the MPU 62 executes the processes after step S1107.

In step S1107, the MPU 62 sets the special mode flag in the RAM 64. The MPU 62 maintains the special mode flag if it has already been set in the RAM 64. As a result, the MPU 62 sets the game mode to the special mode.
In step S1108, the MPU 62 sets “30” to the value of the game count counter RTC provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64.
In step S1111A, the MPU 62 sets a special mode command. After that, the MPU 62 ends the transition process at the end of the open / close execution mode. This special mode command includes information for causing the voice emission control device 90 to recognize that the game mode is set to the special mode. The MPU 62 transmits the special mode command set in step S1111A to the voice emission control device 90 in step S301 of the normal process.
The voice emission control device 90 recognizes the transition to the special mode based on the special mode command transmitted from the MPU 62, and executes a predetermined process. This process will be described in detail later.

Here, when the special mode flag is set in the RAM 64, the special mode continues until 30 game times, which is the end reference number set in the game number counter RTC, is exhausted. The MPU 62 clears the special mode flag when it has completed 30 game times. As a result, the MPU 62 sets the game mode to the normal mode.
After executing the process of step S1108, the MPU 62 clears the hold information stored in the hold area Rb for the second result display unit based on the winning of the game ball to the lower operating port 37.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step S1110A that the lottery in the special mode has not been won, the MPU 62 executes the processes after step S1112A.
In step S1112A, the MPU 62 clears the special mode flag stored in the RAM 64. As a result, the MPU 62 sets the game mode to the normal mode.
In step S1113A, the MPU 62 sets “0” to the value of the game count counter RTC provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64. After that, the MPU 62 ends the transition process at the end of the open / close execution mode.

In this way, when a hit occurs in the winning / failing lottery and the sorting result becomes the "high frequency support mode result" in the sorting lottery, the game state is the open / close execution mode regardless of the current game state. After the end, it shifts to the high frequency support mode. The high-frequency support mode shifts to the low-frequency support mode when 100 game times have been completed without a hit in the winning / losing lottery. In the high frequency support mode, the game mode is always the normal mode.

In addition, when a hit occurs in the winning / failing lottery and the sorting result becomes the "low frequency support mode result" in the sorting lottery, the game state is the open / close execution mode if the game mode is the special mode. After the end, the mode shifts to the high frequency support mode, and if the game mode is the normal mode, the mode shifts to the low frequency support mode after the end of the open / close execution mode. The high-frequency support mode shifts to the low-frequency support mode when 100 game times have been completed without a hit in the winning / losing lottery. In the high frequency support mode, the game mode is always the normal mode. The low frequency support mode continues at least until a win occurs in the winning or losing lottery. In the low frequency support mode, the game mode has a 1/8 chance of becoming a special mode and a 7/8 chance of becoming a normal mode. When the special mode is set, the game mode stays in the special mode until 30 game times are exhausted, and then shifts to the normal mode.

In addition, if there is no winning in the winning / failing lottery, that is, if the winning / failing result becomes a "normally out of order result" in the winning / failing lottery, the gaming state does not shift.

Here, the value of the game count counter RTC is included in the above-mentioned variable command. Further, the information related to the game mode (information related to whether or not the special mode flag is set in the RAM 64) is included in the above-mentioned opening command.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the main control device 60 functions as a game state transition means for shifting the game state based on the result of the internal lottery.
Further, in the present embodiment, the low frequency support mode has a game mode of a normal mode and a special mode.

Then, in the present embodiment, the main control device 60 has a low frequency in the normal mode and the high frequency support mode of the low frequency support mode based on the result of the internal lottery (low frequency support mode result or high frequency support mode result). The game state is shifted to either the support mode or the high frequency support mode, and in the special mode of the low frequency support mode, the game state is shifted to the high frequency support mode regardless of the result of the internal lottery. According to this, the player will play with the expectation that he / she will stay in the special mode even when the gaming state is shifted to the low frequency support mode. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 is the player. It is possible to improve the degree of attention to the game.
In the present embodiment, the high-frequency support mode does not have the game mode of the special mode, but it may have it.

Further, in the present embodiment, the main control device 60 is set to the opening / closing execution mode which is advantageous for the player based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the upper operating port 36 and the lower operating port 37. When the game state is changed from the normal control state and the game state is changed from the open / close execution mode to the normal control state, the game state is changed to either the low frequency support mode or the high frequency support mode. According to this, when the player shifts to the low frequency support mode, he / she pays attention to whether or not he / she stays in the special mode. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 pays attention to the player's game. Can be improved.

Further, in the present embodiment, the right variable ball entry mechanism 40 fires toward the right-handed route based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the upper operating port 36 and the lower operating port 37. It functions as a variable ball entry mechanism that enables the ball to be entered. Then, the main control device 60 shifts the game state from the normal control state to the open / close execution mode when the game ball enters the right variable ball entry mechanism 40. Here, the probability of shifting to the open / close execution mode via the variable entry execution mode (about 1 / 12.5) is based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the lower operating port 37. , Based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the upper operating port 36, the probability of shifting to the open / close execution mode via the variable entry execution mode (about 1/60) is higher. There is. According to this, the player expects to shift the game state to the high-frequency support mode, so that the pachinko machine 10 can improve the player's attention to the game.

Further, in the present embodiment, the main control device 60 is set to either the normal mode or the special mode based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the upper operating port 36 and the lower operating port 37. Shift the game mode. Specifically, the main control device 60 shifts the gaming mode to the normal mode or the special mode when shifting the gaming state to the low frequency support mode, and shifts the gaming state to the high frequency support mode. , Shift the game mode to the normal mode. According to this, the player pays attention to the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the upper operating port 36 and the lower operating port 37, so that the pachinko machine 10 is the player's game. It is possible to improve the degree of attention to.
In the present embodiment, when the main control device 60 shifts the game state to the low frequency support mode, the game mode shifts to the normal mode or the special mode, and the game state shifts to the high frequency support mode. The game mode is shifted to the normal mode, but the game mode may be shifted to either the normal mode or the special mode based on other conditions.

Further, in the present embodiment, the main control device 60 shifts the game mode from the special mode to the normal mode when a predetermined number of game times (30 times in the present embodiment) are exhausted after shifting the game mode to the special mode. Transition. According to this, since the player pays attention to the number of times the game is digested, the pachinko machine 10 can improve the player's attention to the game.
In the present embodiment, the main control device 60 shifts the game mode from the special mode to the normal mode when 30 game times have been completed after shifting the game mode to the special mode. However, other than this. The game mode may be shifted from the special mode to the normal mode when the number of game times is exhausted. For example, the number of times the game is digested is set by dividing it into a plurality of times such as 30 times and 50 times. You may do so.

Further, in the present embodiment, the main control device 60 shifts the game mode from the special mode to the normal mode when 30 game times have been completed after shifting the game mode to the special mode. As a result of the internal lottery conducted based on the winning of the upper operating port 36 or the lower operating port 37, when the number of "small hit wins" exceeds a predetermined number, the game mode is changed from the special mode to the normal mode. You may want to migrate.

Further, in the present embodiment, the main control device 60 shifts the game mode from the special mode to the normal mode when 30 game times have been completed after shifting the game mode to the special mode. When the game ball is fired toward the right-handed route, the game mode may be changed from the special mode to the normal mode. In other words, the main control device 60 may end the special mode as a penalty when the game ball is launched toward the right-handed route during the stay in the special mode. According to this, the player fires the game ball toward the right-handed route in the high-frequency support mode, and fires the game ball toward the left-handed route in the low-frequency support mode in the special mode. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can surely reflect the player's intention, and the player can comfortably play the game.

Further, in the present embodiment, the low-frequency support mode result functions as the first lottery result for shifting the gaming state to either the low-frequency support mode or the high-frequency support mode, and the high-frequency support mode result is the high-frequency support mode result. It functions as a second lottery result for shifting the game state to the support mode. According to this, the pachinko machine 10 can shift the gaming state to the high-frequency support mode even when the result of the low-frequency support mode is obtained, and the opportunity to shift the gaming state to the high-frequency support mode is increased. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can improve the player's attention to the game.
Then, in the low-frequency support mode, the game state is changed to the normal mode in which the game state is shifted to the low-frequency support mode when the result of the low-frequency support mode is obtained, and the game state is changed to the high-frequency support mode when the result of the low-frequency support mode is obtained. It has a special mode to shift. According to this, the player will play with the expectation that he / she will stay in the special mode even when the gaming state is shifted to the low frequency support mode. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 is the player. It is possible to improve the degree of attention to the game.

Further, in the present embodiment, the low-frequency support mode includes a normal mode and a special mode in which the probability of transitioning to a gaming state advantageous to the player is higher than that of the normal mode. Specifically, in the present embodiment, the special mode has a higher probability of shifting to the high frequency support mode than the normal mode. According to this, the player will play with the expectation that he / she will stay in the special mode even when the gaming state is shifted to the low frequency support mode. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 is the player. It is possible to improve the degree of attention to the game.
In the present embodiment, the special mode has a higher probability of shifting to the high frequency support mode than the normal mode and is 100%, but it does not have to be 100%. In short, the special mode only needs to have a higher probability of transitioning to the high frequency support mode than the normal mode.

Then, the main control device 60 changes from the normal control state to the opening / closing execution mode which is advantageous to the player, based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the upper operating port 36 and the lower operating port 37. When the state is changed and the game state is changed from the open / close execution mode to the normal control state, the game mode is changed to either the normal mode or the special mode.
In the present embodiment, when the main control device 60 shifts the game state from the open / close execution mode to the normal control state, the game mode shifts to either the normal mode or the special mode, but other than this. The game mode may be shifted to either the normal mode or the special mode at the timing. For example, the game mode may be shifted to either the normal mode or the special mode during the digestion of the game times.

Further, in the present embodiment, the transition process at the end of the open / close execution mode functions as a special mode lottery means for executing a special mode lottery as to whether or not to shift the game mode to the special mode. Then, the main control device 60 shifts the game mode to the normal mode when the special mode lottery is not won, and shifts the game mode to the special mode when the special mode lottery is won. According to this, the main control device 60 shifts the game mode to the normal mode when the special mode lottery is not won, and shifts the game mode to the special mode when the special mode lottery is won. Will pay attention to the result of the special mode lottery. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can improve the player's attention to the game.
In the present embodiment, the transition process at the end of the open / close execution mode executes the special mode lottery in the special mode lottery process of step S1109A. A special mode lottery may be performed.

Further, in the present embodiment, the voice emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 execute a process different from that of the first embodiment. Specifically, in the present embodiment, the effect determination process is different from that of the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the content of the effect determination process in the present embodiment will be described.

<Regarding the effect determination process executed by the voice emission control device 90>
FIG. 33 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the effect determination process.
The MPU 92 of the voice emission control device 90 executes the effect determination process in order to execute the effect for the game round, the effect for the variable input ball execution mode, the effect for the open / close execution mode, and the like. In this effect determination process, as shown in FIG. 33, the MPU 92 executes the processes of steps S2101 to S2111 in the same manner as in the first embodiment, and then executes the processes of steps S2112 and subsequent steps.

In step S2112, the MPU 92 determines whether or not the opening command has been received.

When the MPU 92 determines in step S2112 that the opening command has not been received, the MPU 92 executes the processes after step S2117A.
On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines that the opening command has been received in step S2112, the MPU 92 determines the type of distribution result based on the content of the opening command in step S2113.

In step S2114A, the MPU 92 executes the effect determination process for the open / close execution mode corresponding to the type of distribution result determined in step S2113.

FIG. 34 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the effect determination process for the open / close execution mode.
The MPU 92 of the voice emission control device 90 executes the effect determination process for the open / close execution mode in order to determine the effect for the open / close execution mode. In the effect determination process for the open / close execution mode, the MPU 92 executes steps S2201 to S2204A as shown in FIG. 34.

In step S2201, the MPU 92 determines whether or not the distribution result determined in step S2113 is the “high frequency support mode result”.
When the MPU 92 determines in step S2201 that the game result is the "high frequency support mode result", the MPU 92 selects the effect A as the effect for the open / close execution mode in step S2202. After that, the MPU 62 ends the effect determination process for the open / close execution mode.
On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines in step S2201 that the distribution result is not the "high frequency support mode result" (when the distribution result is determined to be the "low frequency support mode result"), the MPU 92 determines. In step S2203, based on the content of the opening command, it is determined whether or not the game mode when the "big hit win" is obtained in the winning / losing lottery is the special mode.

When the MPU 92 determines in step S2203 that the game mode is a special mode, the MPU 92 executes the processes after step S2202 described above, and selects the effect A as the effect for the open / close execution mode. After that, the MPU 62 ends the effect determination process for the open / close execution mode.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step S2203 that the game mode is not the special mode (when it is determined that the game mode is the normal mode), the MPU 92 is produced as an effect for the open / close execution mode in step S2204A. Select B1. After that, the MPU 62 ends the effect determination process for the open / close execution mode.
The duration of the effect A and the effect B1 corresponds to the time when the large winning opening 38a is opened and closed 15 times in the open / close execution mode.

Further, the MPU 92 executes the light emission control of the indicator lamp unit 23 and the voice control of the speaker unit 24 in the effect execution process of step S2003 described above based on the selection results of the effect A and the effect B1.

Here, the effect B1 of the present embodiment is different from the effect B of the first embodiment.
Specifically, in the effect B of the first embodiment, the MPU 102 displays a character on the display screen G of the symbol display device 51 at the end of the open / close execution mode, and the dialogue of this character "30 rotation chance zone. The player was notified by "!" That the game result was the "low frequency support mode result" (shifting to the special mode) (see FIGS. 30 (D) and 31 (E)).
On the other hand, in the effect B1 of the present embodiment, the MPU 102 does not display the character or the dialogue of this character on the display screen G of the symbol display device 51 at the end of the open / close execution mode, and is in a special mode for the player. It is different from the effect B of the first embodiment in that it does not notify the transition to.

Returning to the description of the effect determination process, the processes after step S2115 will be described with reference to FIG. 33.
In step S2115, the MPU 92 sets a command for the open / close execution mode including information related to the effect for the open / close execution mode selected in step S2114A. This open / close execution mode command is transmitted to the display control device 100 in the command transmission process in step S2005 described above.

The MPU 102 of the display control device 100 reads from the program ROM 103 a data table for executing the effect for the open / close execution mode on the symbol display device 51 based on the open / close execution mode command transmitted from the MPU 92. Then, the MPU 102 outputs a command to the VDP 105 based on this data table every time the predetermined image update timing (for example, 20 msec cycle) is reached. As a result, the symbol display device 51 executes the effect for the open / close execution mode selected by the MPU 92 of the voice emission control device 90.

After executing the process of step S2115, or when it is determined in step S2112 that the opening command has not been received, the MPU 92 executes the processes of step S2117A and subsequent steps.

In step S2117A, the MPU 92 determines whether or not a special mode command has been received.

When the MPU 92 determines that the special mode command has been received in step S2117A, the MPU 92 executes the special mode notification process in step S2118A based on the content of the special mode command. In this special mode notification process, the MPU 92 sets a special mode notification command. This special mode notification command is transmitted to the display control device 100 in the command transmission process in step S2005 described above.

The MPU 102 of the display control device 100 reads from the program ROM 103 a data table for notifying the player to shift to the special mode based on the special mode notification command transmitted from the MPU 92. Then, the MPU 102 outputs a command to the VDP 105 based on this data table every time the predetermined image update timing (for example, 20 msec cycle) is reached. As a result, the symbol display device 51 notifies the player that the mode is to be changed to the special mode. Specifically, the MPU 102 displays a character on the display screen G of the symbol display device 51 at the end of the open / close execution mode, and is special to the player in the line "30 rotation chance zone!" Of this character. Notify that the mode is changed.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step S2117A that the special mode command has not been received, the MPU 92 executes the processes after step S2116.
In step S2116, the MPU 92 executes other processing. In other processes, the MPU 92 executes a process for advancing the effect for the open / close execution mode based on, for example, an open command, a close command, an ending command, or the like transmitted from the MPU 62. After that, the MPU 92 ends the effect determination process.

<Relationship between game results and game status>
Hereinafter, the relationship between the game result and the game state based on the execution of various processes will be described.
FIG. 35 is a diagram showing the relationship between the game result and the game state and the like. Specifically, FIG. 35 is a diagram showing the relationship between the game result excluding the “normal deviation result” and the game state, and the game results are arranged in the column direction and the game state and the like are arranged in the row direction.
As shown in FIG. 35, the pachinko machine 10 has a game mode of a normal mode and a special mode. In addition, the pachinko machine 10 has a distribution result of "high frequency support mode result" and "low frequency support mode result" as game results excluding "normal deviation result".

Hereinafter, the relationship between the game result excluding the “normal deviation result” and the game state and the like will be described. In the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 sets the relationship between the game result and the game state as follows, but the combination of the game result and the game state, the content of the game result, and the game state, etc. The contents such as the game state are arbitrary.

In the game mode of the normal mode, the contents of the game state and the like differ depending on the game results of the "high frequency support mode result" and the "low frequency support mode result".
Specifically, in the "high frequency support mode result", the opening and closing of the large winning opening 38a is executed 15 times. Further, in the "high frequency support mode result" based on the winning of the upper operating port 36, the stop result is a combination of symbols having the same odd number, and the effect for the open / close execution mode is effect A. .. In the "high frequency support mode result" based on the winning of the lower operating port 37, the stop result is a combination of symbols having the same alphabetic character, and the effect for the open / close execution mode is effect A. Further, in the "high frequency support mode result", the support mode shifts to the high frequency support mode. Then, the next game mode will be the normal mode.

Further, in the "low frequency support mode result", the opening and closing of the large winning opening 38a is executed 15 times. Further, in the "low frequency support mode result" based on the winning of the upper operating port 36, the stop result is a combination of symbols having the same even number, and the effect for the open / close execution mode is effect B1. .. In the "low frequency support mode result" based on the winning of the lower operating port 37, the stop result is a combination of symbols having the same alphabetic character, and the effect for the open / close execution mode is effect B1. Further, in the "low frequency support mode result", the support mode shifts to the low frequency support mode. Then, the next game mode has a 1/8 probability of becoming a "special mode" and a 7/8 probability of becoming a "normal mode".

On the other hand, in the game mode of the "special mode", the contents of the game state and the like are the same regardless of the game results of the "high frequency support mode result" and the "low frequency support mode result".
Specifically, the opening and closing of the grand prize opening 38a is executed 15 times. Further, in the game result based on the winning of the upper operating port 36, the stop result is a combination of symbols having the same number, and the effect for the open / close execution mode is the effect A. Further, the support mode shifts to the high frequency support mode. Then, the next game mode will be the normal mode.

Therefore, the player can grasp that the distribution result is the "high frequency support mode result" or the "low frequency support mode result" by checking the stop result and the effect for the open / close execution mode. It is possible to know that the next game mode is the normal mode or the special mode.

<About the flow after the game ball enters the right variable entry mechanism>
FIG. 36 is a diagram showing an effect for the opening / closing execution mode when a game ball wins a prize (V prize) at the right entrance.
In the variable ball entry execution mode, the MPU 102 executes an effect corresponding to the success of the V winning, as shown in FIG. 36 (A), when the game ball wins the right entry port 404 (V winning). After that, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the open / close execution mode.

In the effect determination process for the open / close execution mode, the MPU 92 determines in step S2201 that the game result is the "high frequency support mode result", or in step S2203 that the game mode is the special mode. In this case, in step S2202, the effect A is selected as the effect for the open / close execution mode. In this effect A, as shown in FIG. 36 (B), the MPU 102 displays a character on the display screen G of the symbol display device 51 at the end of the open / close execution mode, and at the same time, the line “RUSH rush!” Of this character is displayed. The player is notified that the game result is the "high frequency support mode result".

After that, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the high frequency support mode as shown in FIG. 36 (C). In the high frequency support mode, the game mode shifts to the normal mode. In the high-frequency support mode, the MPU 102 displays the value of the game count counter RTC as the remaining number of times up to the end reference number of the high-frequency support mode (100 times in FIG. 36 (C)) based on the content of the variable command. It is displayed on the upper left of the display screen G of the device 51. Further, in the high frequency support mode, the MPU 102 displays a right-pointing arrow at the upper right of the display screen G of the symbol display device 51 in order to suggest the player to hit right.

On the other hand, in the effect determination process for the open / close execution mode, the MPU 92 determines in step S2201 that the game result is not the "high frequency support mode result", and in step S2203 that the game mode is not the special mode. If this is the case (when it is determined that the game mode is the normal mode), in step S2204A, the effect B1 is selected as the effect for the open / close execution mode.

Then, when the MPU 62 determines that the special mode lottery has been won in step S1110A, the special mode command is set in step S1111A, and the MPU 92 receives the special mode command in step S2117A. If it is determined, in step S2118A, the special mode notification process is executed based on the content of the special mode command. In this special mode notification process, the MPU 92 sets a special mode notification command. This special mode notification command is transmitted to the display control device 100 in the command transmission process in step S2005 described above.

Based on the special mode command transmitted from the MPU 92, the MPU 102 displays a character on the display screen G of the symbol display device 51 after the end of the open / close execution mode, as shown in FIG. 36 (D), and also displays the character's dialogue. Notify the player that the player will shift to the special mode at "30 rotation chance zone!".

On the other hand, if the MPU 62 determines in step S1110A that the special mode lottery has not been won, the special mode command is not set. Therefore, the MPU 102 displays the symbol display device 51 at the end of the open / close execution mode. The character and the dialogue of this character are not displayed on the screen G, and the player is not notified of the transition to the special mode (not shown).
In the present embodiment, the MPU 102 does not display the character or the dialogue of the character on the display screen G of the symbol display device 51 at the end of the open / close execution mode, and notifies the player that the mode shifts to the special mode. By not doing so, he was informed that he did not win the special mode lottery. On the other hand, the MPU 102 displays a character and the dialogue of this character on the display screen G of the symbol display device 51 at the end of the open / close execution mode, and disguises as if the lottery in the special mode was won. May be good. According to this, the player can play the game while enjoying the prediction of whether or not he / she has won the lottery in the special mode.

After that, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the low frequency support mode as shown in FIG. 36 (E). In the low frequency support mode, the game mode has a 1/8 chance of becoming a special mode and a 7/8 chance of becoming a normal mode. When the special mode is set, the game mode stays in the special mode until 30 game times are exhausted, and then shifts to the normal mode. In the special mode, the MPU 102 displays the symbol display device 51 with the value of the game count counter RTC as the remaining number of times up to the end reference number of the special mode (30 times in FIG. 36 (E)) based on the content of the variation command. Displayed in the upper left of screen G. Further, in the low frequency support mode of the special mode, the MPU 102 displays a left-pointing arrow at the upper right of the display screen G of the symbol display device 51 in order to suggest a left-handed strike to the player.
In the present embodiment, the remaining number of times up to the end reference number of times of the special mode is displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 51, but this may not be displayed.

FIG. 37 is a diagram showing an effect for playing a game when staying in the special mode.
In the special mode, the MPU 102 starts variable display of a plurality of symbol strings Z1 to Z3 (see FIG. 4A) displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 51 based on the pattern command received from the MPU 92. By doing so, it shifts to a high-speed fluctuation period. In this high-speed fluctuation period, the MPU 102 starts the fluctuation display of the symbols by periodically scrolling the symbols of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction (upward in the present embodiment). Further, the MPU 102 sets the value of the game count counter RTC as the remaining number of times up to the end reference number of the special mode (15 times in FIG. 37 (A)) based on the content of the variation command, and sets the display screen G of the symbol display device 51. It is displayed in the upper left of. Further, in the low frequency support mode of the special mode, the MPU 102 displays a left-pointing arrow at the upper right of the display screen G of the symbol display device 51 in order to suggest a left-handed strike to the player.
In the present embodiment, the remaining number of times up to the end reference number of times of the special mode is displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 51, but this may not be displayed.

After the lapse of the high-speed fluctuation period, the MPU 102 stops and displays some of the symbol rows (symbol row Z1 and symbol row Z3) on the effective line L (see FIG. 4 (A)), thereby causing the same combination of symbols (see FIG. 4 (A)). In the present embodiment, "2") is displayed to indicate the stop result, and the remaining symbol sequence (symbol sequence Z2) is variablely displayed in that state to generate the reach display and shift to the reach period.

After that, based on the stop result command received from the MPU 92, the MPU 102 enables a combination of symbols having the same number (“222” in the present embodiment) as the stop result, as shown in FIG. 37 (B). By displaying the stop on L, the result of the winning / failing lottery is notified. After that, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the open / close execution mode.

In the effect determination process for the open / close execution mode, the MPU 92 determines in step S2201 that the game result is the "high frequency support mode result", or in step S2203 that the game mode is the special mode. In this case, in step S2202, the effect A is selected as the effect for the open / close execution mode. In other words, in the special mode, the effect A is selected as the effect for the open / close execution mode regardless of the content of the game result. In this effect A, as shown in FIG. 37 (C), the MPU 102 displays a character on the display screen G of the symbol display device 51 at the end of the open / close execution mode, and at the same time, the line “RUSH rush!” Of this character is displayed. The player is notified that the game result is the "high frequency support mode result".

After that, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the high frequency support mode. In the high frequency support mode, the game mode shifts to the normal mode. In the high-frequency support mode, the MPU 102 displays the value of the game count counter RTC as the remaining number of times up to the end reference number of the high-frequency support mode (100 times in FIG. 37 (C)) based on the content of the variable command. It is displayed on the upper left of the display screen G of the device 51. Further, in the high frequency support mode, the MPU 102 displays a right-pointing arrow at the upper right of the display screen G of the symbol display device 51 in order to suggest the player to hit right.

In addition, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the normal mode as shown in FIG. 37 (D) when the pachinko machine 10 has completed 30 game rounds without becoming a "big hit win" in the winning / losing lottery.

In the normal mode, the MPU 102 starts variable display of a plurality of symbol strings Z1 to Z3 (see FIG. 4A) displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 51 based on the pattern command received from the MPU 92. By doing so, it shifts to a high-speed fluctuation period. In this high-speed fluctuation period, the MPU 102 starts the fluctuation display of the symbols by periodically scrolling the symbols of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction (upward in the present embodiment).
After the lapse of the high-speed fluctuation period, the MPU 102 stops and displays some of the symbol rows (symbol row Z1 and symbol row Z3) on the effective line L (see FIG. 4 (A)) to display the same combination of symbols. By displaying and suggesting the stop result and displaying the remaining symbol sequence (symbol sequence Z2) in a variable manner in that state, the reach display is generated and the reach period is entered.

After that, the MPU 102 notifies the result of the winning / failing lottery by stopping and displaying a combination of symbols having the same number on the effective line L as the stop result based on the stop result command received from the MPU 92. After that, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the open / close execution mode.

In the process of determining the effect for the open / close execution mode, when the MPU 92 determines in step S2201 that the game result is the "high frequency support mode result", in step S2202, the effect A is performed as the effect for the open / close execution mode. Select. In this effect A, as shown in FIG. 37C, the MPU 102 displays a character on the display screen G of the symbol display device 51 at the end of the open / close execution mode, and at the same time, the line “RUSH rush!” Of this character is displayed. The player is notified that the game result is the "high frequency support mode result".
After that, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the high frequency support mode. In the high frequency support mode, the game mode shifts to the normal mode. In the high-frequency support mode, the MPU 102 displays the value of the game count counter RTC as the remaining number of times up to the end reference number of the high-frequency support mode (100 times in FIG. 37 (C)) based on the content of the variable command. It is displayed on the upper left of the display screen G of the device 51. Further, in the high frequency support mode, the MPU 102 displays a right-pointing arrow at the upper right of the display screen G of the symbol display device 51 in order to suggest the player to hit right.

On the other hand, in the effect determination process for the open / close execution mode, the MPU 92 determines in step S2201 that the game result is not the "high frequency support mode result", and in step S2203 that the game mode is not the special mode. If this is the case (when it is determined that the game mode is the normal mode), in step S2204A, the effect B1 is selected as the effect for the open / close execution mode.

Then, when the MPU 62 determines that the special mode lottery has been won in step S1110A, the special mode command is set in step S1111A, and the MPU 92 receives the special mode command in step S2117A. If it is determined, in step S2118A, the special mode notification process is executed based on the content of the special mode command. In this special mode notification process, the MPU 92 sets a special mode notification command. This special mode notification command is transmitted to the display control device 100 in the command transmission process in step S2005 described above.

Based on the special mode command transmitted from the MPU 92, the MPU 102 displays a character on the display screen G of the symbol display device 51 after the end of the open / close execution mode, and sets the character's line "30 rotation chance zone!" The player is notified of the transition to the special mode (see FIG. 36 (D)). Further, in the low frequency support mode of the special mode, the MPU 102 displays a left-pointing arrow at the upper right of the display screen G of the symbol display device 51 in order to suggest a left-handed strike to the player.

On the other hand, if the MPU 62 determines in step S1110A that the special mode lottery has not been won, the special mode command is not set. Therefore, the MPU 102 opens and closes as shown in FIG. 37 (E). At the end of the mode, the character and the dialogue of this character are not displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 51, and the player is not notified that the mode is changed to the special mode.
In the present embodiment, the MPU 102 does not display the character or the dialogue of the character on the display screen G of the symbol display device 51 at the end of the open / close execution mode, and notifies the player that the mode shifts to the special mode. By not doing so, he was informed that he did not win the special mode lottery. On the other hand, the MPU 102 displays a character and the dialogue of this character on the display screen G of the symbol display device 51 at the end of the open / close execution mode, and disguises as if the lottery in the special mode was won. May be good. According to this, the player can play the game while enjoying the prediction of whether or not he / she has won the lottery in the special mode.

After that, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the low frequency support mode. In the low frequency support mode, the game mode has a 1/8 chance of becoming a special mode and a 7/8 chance of becoming a normal mode. When the special mode is set, the game mode stays in the special mode until 30 game times are exhausted, and then shifts to the normal mode. In the special mode, the MPU 102 displays the value of the game count counter RTC as the remaining number of times up to the end reference number of the special mode on the upper left of the display screen G of the symbol display device 51 based on the content of the variation command. Further, in the low frequency support mode of the special mode, the MPU 102 displays a left-pointing arrow at the upper right of the display screen G of the symbol display device 51 in order to suggest a left-handed strike to the player.
In the present embodiment, the remaining number of times up to the end reference number of times of the special mode is displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 51, but this may not be displayed.

According to such an embodiment, the same actions and effects as those of (1) to (4), (5) to (8), (10), and (11) in the first embodiment can be obtained. In addition, the following actions and effects can be achieved.
(12) The main control device 60 shifts the game mode to the normal mode when the special mode lottery is not won, and shifts the game mode to the special mode when the special mode lottery is won. We will pay attention to the result of the special mode lottery. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can improve the player's attention to the game.

[Third Embodiment]
Hereinafter, a third embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.
In the following description, the parts already described will be designated by the same reference numerals and the description thereof will be omitted.

In the first embodiment, when the winning / losing lottery results in "big hit winning" and the special mode flag is set in the RAM 64, the gaming state is the open / close execution mode (that is, the round number specified mode) regardless of the current gaming state. ), The mode was changed to the special mode. When the special mode flag is set in the RAM 64, this special mode is continued until 30 game times, which is the end reference number set in the game number counter RTC, is exhausted.
On the other hand, in the present embodiment, after shifting to the special mode, the MPU 62 executes a lottery as to whether or not to continue the special mode each time the game times are exhausted, and when the lottery is not won. Is different from the first embodiment in that it shifts to the normal mode.

In the present embodiment, the main control device 60 executes a process different from that of the first embodiment. Specifically, in the present embodiment, the transition process and the variable end process at the end of the open / close execution mode are different from those in the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the contents of the transition process and the variable end process at the end of the open / close execution mode in the present embodiment will be described.

FIG. 38 is a diagram showing a flowchart of a transition process at the end of the opening / closing execution mode according to the third embodiment of the present invention.
In the transition process at the end of the open / close execution mode, the MPU 62 executes steps S1101 to S1107 as shown in FIG. 38. The MPU 62 is different from the first embodiment in that the MPU 62 ends the transition process at the end of the open / close execution mode without executing the process of step S1108 after executing the process of step S1107.

<Variation end processing>
FIG. 39 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the variation end process.
In the variable termination process, the MPU 62 executes steps S1301 to S1310B, as shown in FIG. 39. In this embodiment, the MPU 62 executes the processes of steps S1301 to S1305 in the same manner as in the first embodiment, and then executes the processes of steps S1306 and subsequent steps.

After executing the process of step S1305, if it is determined in step S1302 that the support mode is not the high frequency support mode, or if it is determined in step S1304 that the game count counter RTC is not "0" or less, the MPU 62 , In step S1306, it is determined whether or not the game mode is a special mode.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S1306 that the game mode is not a special mode (when it determines that the game mode is the normal mode), the MPU 62 ends the variable end process without executing the processes after step S1307B. ..
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1306 that the game mode is the special mode, the MPU 62 executes the continuous lottery process of the special mode in step S1307B. Specifically, in the continuous lottery process of the special mode, the MPU 62 executes a lottery as to whether or not to continue the special mode with a predetermined probability (29/30 in the present embodiment) after the end of the game round.

In the present embodiment, the MPU 62 has a probability of continuing the special mode of 29/30 (probability of shifting to the normal mode is 1/30), but may be larger than 29/30 and smaller than 29/30. You may. Further, the MPU 62 lowers the probability of continuing the special mode when, for example, the number of game times digested before becoming a "big hit" in the winning / losing lottery is smaller than a predetermined number, and the "big hit" in the winning / losing lottery. If the number of game times digested before becoming "winning" is greater than the predetermined number, the probability of continuing the special mode may be increased, and the probability of continuing the special mode depending on other game situations may be increased. It may be varied.

In step S1308B, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the special mode continuous lottery has been won.
When it is determined in step S1308B that the MPU 62 has won the continuous lottery in the special mode, the MPU 62 ends the variable end process without executing the processes after step S1309.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step S1308B that the MPU 62 has not won the continuous lottery of the special mode, the MPU 62 clears the special mode flag stored in the RAM 64 in step S1309. As a result, the MPU 62 sets the game mode to the normal mode.
In step S1310B, the MPU 62 sets a normal mode command. After that, the MPU 62 ends the fluctuation end processing. This normal mode command includes information for causing the voice emission control device 90 to recognize that the game mode is set to the normal mode. The MPU 62 transmits the normal mode command set in step S1310B to the voice emission control device 90 in step S301 of the normal processing.
The voice emission control device 90 recognizes the transition to the normal mode based on the normal mode command transmitted from the MPU 62, and executes a predetermined process. This process will be described in detail later.

In this way, when the winning / losing lottery results in "big hit winning" and the special mode flag is set in the RAM 64, the game state ends regardless of the current game state (that is, the round number specified mode). Later, it shifts to the special mode. The special mode will continue if the continuous lottery process of the special mode in step S1307B is won.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the main control device 60 functions as a game state transition means for shifting the game state based on the result of the internal lottery.
Further, in the present embodiment, the low frequency support mode has a game mode of a normal mode and a special mode.

Then, in the present embodiment, the main control device 60 has a low frequency in the normal mode and the high frequency support mode of the low frequency support mode based on the result of the internal lottery (low frequency support mode result or high frequency support mode result). The game state is shifted to either the support mode or the high frequency support mode, and in the special mode of the low frequency support mode, the game state is shifted to the high frequency support mode regardless of the result of the internal lottery. According to this, the player will play with the expectation that he / she will stay in the special mode even when the gaming state is shifted to the low frequency support mode. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 is the player. It is possible to improve the degree of attention to the game.
In the present embodiment, the high-frequency support mode does not have the game mode of the special mode, but it may have it.

Further, in the present embodiment, the main control device 60 is set to the opening / closing execution mode which is advantageous for the player based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the upper operating port 36 and the lower operating port 37. When the game state is changed from the normal control state and the game state is changed from the open / close execution mode to the normal control state, the game state is changed to either the low frequency support mode or the high frequency support mode. According to this, when the player shifts to the low frequency support mode, he / she pays attention to whether or not he / she stays in the special mode. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 pays attention to the player's game. Can be improved.

Further, in the present embodiment, the right variable ball entry mechanism 40 fires toward the right-handed route based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the upper operating port 36 and the lower operating port 37. It functions as a variable ball entry mechanism that enables the ball to be entered. Then, the main control device 60 shifts the game state from the normal control state to the open / close execution mode when the game ball enters the right variable ball entry mechanism 40. Here, the probability of shifting to the open / close execution mode via the variable entry execution mode (about 1 / 12.5) is based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the lower operating port 37. , Based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the upper operating port 36, the probability of shifting to the open / close execution mode via the variable entry execution mode (about 1/60) is higher. There is. According to this, the player expects to shift the game state to the high-frequency support mode, so that the pachinko machine 10 can improve the player's attention to the game.

Further, in the present embodiment, the main control device 60 is set to either the normal mode or the special mode based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the upper operating port 36 and the lower operating port 37. Shift the game mode. Specifically, the main control device 60 shifts the gaming mode to the special mode when shifting to the low-frequency support mode, and shifts to the normal mode when shifting to the high-frequency support mode. Shift the game mode to. According to this, the player pays attention to the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the upper operating port 36 and the lower operating port 37, so that the pachinko machine 10 is the player's game. It is possible to improve the degree of attention to.
In the present embodiment, the main control device 60 shifts the gaming mode to the special mode when shifting to the low frequency support mode, and shifts the gaming state to the high frequency support mode. Although the game mode is shifted to the normal mode, the game mode may be shifted to either the normal mode or the special mode based on other conditions.

Further, in the present embodiment, the variable end processing is a normal mode lottery means for executing a normal mode lottery as to whether or not to shift the game mode to the normal mode after shifting the game mode to the special mode by the main control device 60. Functions as. Then, when the main control device 60 wins the normal mode lottery, the game mode shifts to the normal mode. According to this, when the main control device 60 wins the normal mode lottery, the game mode shifts to the normal mode, so that the player pays attention to the result of the normal mode lottery. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can improve the player's attention to the game.
In the present embodiment, when the main control device 60 does not win the normal mode lottery in which the probability of continuing the special mode is set to 29/30 after shifting to the special mode, the normal mode is changed to the normal mode. Although the game mode is shifted to the mode, for example, the probability of continuing the special mode may be set by dividing it into a plurality of probabilities such as 29/30 and 28/30.

Further, in the present embodiment, the low-frequency support mode result functions as the first lottery result for shifting the gaming state to either the low-frequency support mode or the high-frequency support mode, and the high-frequency support mode result is the high-frequency support mode result. It functions as a second lottery result for shifting the game state to the support mode. According to this, the pachinko machine 10 can shift the gaming state to the high-frequency support mode even when the result of the low-frequency support mode is obtained, and the opportunity to shift the gaming state to the high-frequency support mode is increased. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can improve the player's attention to the game.
Then, in the low-frequency support mode, the game state is changed to the normal mode in which the game state is shifted to the low-frequency support mode when the result of the low-frequency support mode is obtained, and the game state is changed to the high-frequency support mode when the result of the low-frequency support mode is obtained. It has a special mode to shift. According to this, the player will play with the expectation that he / she will stay in the special mode even when the gaming state is shifted to the low frequency support mode. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 is the player. It is possible to improve the degree of attention to the game.

Further, in the present embodiment, the low-frequency support mode includes a normal mode and a special mode in which the probability of transitioning to a gaming state advantageous to the player is higher than that of the normal mode. Specifically, in the present embodiment, the special mode has a higher probability of shifting to the high frequency support mode than the normal mode. According to this, the player will play with the expectation that he / she will stay in the special mode even when the gaming state is shifted to the low frequency support mode. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 is the player. It is possible to improve the degree of attention to the game.
In the present embodiment, the special mode has a higher probability of shifting to the high frequency support mode than the normal mode and is 100%, but it does not have to be 100%. In short, the special mode only needs to have a higher probability of transitioning to the high frequency support mode than the normal mode.

Then, the main control device 60 changes from the normal control state to the opening / closing execution mode which is advantageous to the player, based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the upper operating port 36 and the lower operating port 37. When the state is changed and the game state is changed from the open / close execution mode to the normal control state, the game mode is changed to either the normal mode or the special mode.
In the present embodiment, when the main control device 60 shifts the game state from the open / close execution mode to the normal control state, the game mode shifts to either the normal mode or the special mode, but other than this. The game mode may be shifted to either the normal mode or the special mode at the timing. For example, the game mode may be shifted to either the normal mode or the special mode during the digestion of the game times.

Further, in the present embodiment, the voice emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 execute a process different from that of the first embodiment. Specifically, in the present embodiment, the effect determination process is different from that of the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the content of the effect determination process in the present embodiment will be described.

<Regarding the effect determination process executed by the voice emission control device 90>
FIG. 40 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the effect determination process.
The MPU 92 of the voice emission control device 90 executes the effect determination process in order to execute the effect for the game round, the effect for the variable input ball execution mode, the effect for the open / close execution mode, and the like. In this effect determination process, as shown in FIG. 40, the MPU 92 executes the processes of steps S2101 to S2111 in the same manner as in the first embodiment, and then executes the processes of steps S2112 and subsequent steps.

In step S2112, the MPU 92 determines whether or not the opening command has been received.

When the MPU 92 determines in step S2112 that the opening command has not been received, the MPU 92 executes the processes after step S2119B.
On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines that the opening command has been received in step S2112, the MPU 92 determines the type of distribution result based on the content of the opening command in step S2113.

In step S2114B, the MPU 92 executes the effect determination process for the open / close execution mode corresponding to the type of distribution result determined in step S2113.

FIG. 41 is a diagram showing a flowchart of an effect determination process for the open / close execution mode.
The MPU 92 of the voice emission control device 90 executes the effect determination process for the open / close execution mode in order to determine the effect for the open / close execution mode. In the effect determination process for the open / close execution mode, the MPU 92 executes steps S2201 to S2204B as shown in FIG. 41.

In step S2201, the MPU 92 determines whether or not the distribution result determined in step S2113 is the “high frequency support mode result”.
When the MPU 92 determines in step S2201 that the game result is the "high frequency support mode result", the MPU 92 selects the effect A as the effect for the open / close execution mode in step S2202. After that, the MPU 62 ends the effect determination process for the open / close execution mode.
On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines in step S2201 that the distribution result is not the "high frequency support mode result" (when the distribution result is determined to be the "low frequency support mode result"), the MPU 92 determines. In step S2203, based on the content of the opening command, it is determined whether or not the game mode when the "big hit win" is obtained in the winning / losing lottery is the special mode.

When the MPU 92 determines in step S2203 that the game mode is a special mode, the MPU 92 executes the processes after step S2202 described above, and selects the effect A as the effect for the open / close execution mode. After that, the MPU 62 ends the effect determination process for the open / close execution mode.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step S2203 that the game mode is not the special mode (when it is determined that the game mode is the normal mode), the MPU 92 is produced as an effect for the open / close execution mode in step S2204B. Select B2. After that, the MPU 62 ends the effect determination process for the open / close execution mode.
The duration of the effect A and the effect B2 corresponds to the time when the large winning opening 38a is opened and closed 15 times in the open / close execution mode.

Further, the MPU 92 executes the light emission control of the indicator lamp unit 23 and the voice control of the speaker unit 24 in the effect execution process of step S2003 described above based on the selection results of the effect A and the effect B2.

Here, the effect B2 of the present embodiment is different from the effect B of the first embodiment.
Specifically, in the effect B of the first embodiment, the MPU 102 displays a character on the display screen G of the symbol display device 51 at the end of the open / close execution mode, and the dialogue of this character "30 rotation chance zone. The player was notified by "!" That the game result was the "low frequency support mode result" (shifting to the special mode) (see FIGS. 30 (D) and 31 (E)).
On the other hand, in the effect B2 of the present embodiment, the MPU 102 displays a character on the display screen G of the symbol display device 51 at the end of the open / close execution mode, and at the same time, the line of this character "Enter the chance zone!" It is different from the effect B of the first embodiment in that it notifies the player that the game result is the “low frequency support mode result” (shifting to the special mode).

Returning to the description of the effect determination process, the processes after step S2115 will be described with reference to FIG. 40.
In step S2115, the MPU 92 sets a command for the open / close execution mode including information related to the effect for the open / close execution mode selected in step S2114B. This open / close execution mode command is transmitted to the display control device 100 in the command transmission process in step S2005 described above.

The MPU 102 of the display control device 100 reads from the program ROM 103 a data table for executing the effect for the open / close execution mode on the symbol display device 51 based on the open / close execution mode command transmitted from the MPU 92. Then, the MPU 102 outputs a command to the VDP 105 based on this data table every time the predetermined image update timing (for example, 20 msec cycle) is reached. As a result, the symbol display device 51 executes the effect for the open / close execution mode selected by the MPU 92 of the voice emission control device 90.

After executing the process of step S2115, or when it is determined in step S2112 that the opening command has not been received, the MPU 92 executes the processes of step S2119 and subsequent steps.

In step S2119B, the MPU 92 determines whether or not a normal mode command has been received.

When the MPU 92 determines that the normal mode command has been received in step S2119B, the MPU 92 executes the normal mode notification process in step S2120B based on the content of the normal mode command. In this normal mode notification process, the MPU 92 sets a normal mode notification command. This normal mode notification command is transmitted to the display control device 100 in the command transmission process in step S2005 described above.

The MPU 102 of the display control device 100 reads from the program ROM 103 a data table for notifying the player to shift to the normal mode based on the normal mode notification command transmitted from the MPU 92. Then, the MPU 102 outputs a command to the VDP 105 based on this data table every time the predetermined image update timing (for example, 20 msec cycle) is reached. As a result, the symbol display device 51 notifies the player that the mode will shift to the normal mode. Specifically, the MPU 102 displays a character on the display screen G of the symbol display device 51, and notifies the player that the character shifts to the normal mode at the line "chance zone end" of the character.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step S2119B that the normal mode command has not been received, the MPU 92 executes the processes after step S2116.
In step S2116, the MPU 92 executes other processing. In other processes, the MPU 92 executes a process for advancing the effect for the open / close execution mode based on, for example, an open command, a close command, an ending command, or the like transmitted from the MPU 62. After that, the MPU 92 ends the effect determination process.

<Relationship between game results and game status>
Hereinafter, the relationship between the game result and the game state based on the execution of various processes will be described.
FIG. 42 is a diagram showing the relationship between the game result and the game state and the like. Specifically, FIG. 42 is a diagram showing the relationship between the game result excluding the “normal deviation result” and the game state, and the game results are arranged in the column direction and the game state and the like are arranged in the row direction.
As shown in FIG. 42, the pachinko machine 10 has a game mode of a normal mode and a special mode. In addition, the pachinko machine 10 has a distribution result of "high frequency support mode result" and "low frequency support mode result" as game results excluding "normal deviation result".

Hereinafter, the relationship between the game result excluding the “normal deviation result” and the game state and the like will be described. In the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 sets the relationship between the game result and the game state as follows, but the combination of the game result and the game state, the content of the game result, and the game state, etc. The contents such as the game state are arbitrary.

In the game mode of the normal mode, the contents of the game state and the like differ depending on the game results of the "high frequency support mode result" and the "low frequency support mode result".
Specifically, in the "high frequency support mode result", the opening and closing of the large winning opening 38a is executed 15 times. Further, in the "high frequency support mode result" based on the winning of the upper operating port 36, the stop result is a combination of symbols having the same odd number, and the effect for the open / close execution mode is effect A. .. In the "high frequency support mode result" based on the winning of the lower operating port 37, the stop result is a combination of symbols having the same alphabetic character, and the effect for the open / close execution mode is effect A. Further, in the "high frequency support mode result", the support mode shifts to the high frequency support mode. Then, the next game mode will be the normal mode.

Further, in the "low frequency support mode result", the opening and closing of the large winning opening 38a is executed 15 times. Further, in the "low frequency support mode result" based on the winning of the upper operating port 36, the stop result is a combination of symbols having the same even number, and the effect for the open / close execution mode is effect B2. .. In the "low frequency support mode result" based on the winning of the lower operating port 37, the stop result is a combination of symbols having the same alphabetic characters, and the effect for the open / close execution mode is effect B2. Further, in the "low frequency support mode result", the support mode shifts to the low frequency support mode. Then, the next game mode will be the "special mode".

On the other hand, in the game mode of the "special mode", the contents of the game state and the like are the same regardless of the game results of the "high frequency support mode result" and the "low frequency support mode result".
Specifically, the opening and closing of the grand prize opening 38a is executed 15 times. Further, in the game result based on the winning of the upper operating port 36, the stop result is a combination of symbols having the same number, and the effect for the open / close execution mode is the effect A. Further, the support mode shifts to the high frequency support mode. Then, the next game mode will be the normal mode.

Therefore, the player can grasp that the distribution result is the "high frequency support mode result" or the "low frequency support mode result" by checking the stop result and the effect for the open / close execution mode. It is possible to know that the next game mode is the normal mode or the special mode.

<About the flow after the game ball enters the right variable entry mechanism>
FIG. 43 is a diagram showing an effect for the opening / closing execution mode when a game ball wins a prize (V prize) at the right entrance.
In the variable ball entry execution mode, when the game ball wins a prize (V prize) in the right ball entry port 404, the MPU 102 executes an effect corresponding to the success of the V prize as shown in FIG. 43 (A). After that, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the open / close execution mode.

In the process of determining the effect for the open / close execution mode, when the MPU 92 determines in step S2201 that the game result is the "high frequency support mode result", in step S2202, the effect A is performed as the effect for the open / close execution mode. Select. In this effect A, as shown in FIG. 43 (B), the MPU 102 displays a character on the display screen G of the symbol display device 51 at the end of the open / close execution mode, and at the same time, the line “RUSH rush!” Of this character is displayed. The player is notified that the game result is the "high frequency support mode result".

After that, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the high frequency support mode as shown in FIG. 43 (C). In the high frequency support mode, the game mode shifts to the normal mode. In the high-frequency support mode, the MPU 102 displays the value of the game count counter RTC as the remaining number of times up to the end reference number of the high-frequency support mode (100 times in FIG. 43 (C)) based on the content of the variable command. It is displayed on the upper left of the display screen G of the device 51. Further, in the high frequency support mode, the MPU 102 displays a right-pointing arrow at the upper right of the display screen G of the symbol display device 51 in order to suggest the player to hit right.

On the other hand, in the effect determination process for the open / close execution mode, the MPU 92 determines in step S2201 that the game result is not the "high frequency support mode result", and in step S2203 that the game mode is not the special mode. If this is the case (when it is determined that the game mode is the normal mode), in step S2204B, the effect B2 is selected as the effect for the open / close execution mode. In this effect B2, as shown in FIG. 43 (D), the MPU 102 displays a character on the display screen G of the symbol display device 51 at the end of the open / close execution mode, and at the same time, the line of this character "Enter the chance zone!" Notifies the player that the game result is the "low frequency support mode result" (shifting to the special mode).

After that, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the low frequency support mode as shown in FIG. 43 (E). In the low-frequency support mode, the game mode continues the special mode if it wins the continuous lottery process of the special mode in step S1307B, and shifts to the normal mode if it does not win. Further, in the low frequency support mode of the special mode, the MPU 102 displays a left-pointing arrow at the upper right of the display screen G of the symbol display device 51 in order to suggest a left-handed strike to the player.

FIG. 44 is a diagram showing an effect for playing a game when staying in a special mode.
In the special mode, the MPU 102 starts variable display of a plurality of symbol strings Z1 to Z3 (see FIG. 4A) displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 51 based on the pattern command received from the MPU 92. By doing so, it shifts to a high-speed fluctuation period. In this high-speed fluctuation period, the MPU 102 starts the fluctuation display of the symbols by periodically scrolling the symbols of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction (upward in the present embodiment).
After the lapse of the high-speed fluctuation period, the MPU 102 stops and displays some of the symbol rows (symbol row Z1 and symbol row Z3) on the effective line L (see FIG. 4 (A)), thereby causing the same combination of symbols (see FIG. 4 (A)). In the present embodiment, "2") is displayed to indicate the stop result, and the remaining symbol sequence (symbol sequence Z2) is variablely displayed in that state to generate the reach display and shift to the reach period.

After that, based on the stop result command received from the MPU 92, the MPU 102 enables a combination of symbols having the same number (“222” in the present embodiment) as the stop result, as shown in FIG. 44 (B). By displaying the stop on L, the result of the winning / failing lottery is notified. After that, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the open / close execution mode.

In the effect determination process for the open / close execution mode, the MPU 92 determines in step S2201 that the game result is the "high frequency support mode result", or in step S2203 that the game mode is the special mode. In this case, in step S2202, the effect A is selected as the effect for the open / close execution mode. In other words, in the special mode, the effect A is selected as the effect for the open / close execution mode regardless of the content of the game result. In this effect A, as shown in FIG. 44 (C), the MPU 102 displays a character on the display screen G of the symbol display device 51 at the end of the open / close execution mode, and at the same time, the line “RUSH rush!” Of this character is displayed. The player is notified that the game result is the "high frequency support mode result".

After that, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the high frequency support mode. In the high frequency support mode, the game mode shifts to the normal mode. In the high-frequency support mode, the MPU 102 displays the value of the game count counter RTC as the remaining number of times up to the end reference number of the high-frequency support mode (100 times in FIG. 44 (C)) based on the content of the variable command. It is displayed on the upper left of the display screen G of the device 51. Further, in the high frequency support mode, the MPU 102 displays a right-pointing arrow at the upper right of the display screen G of the symbol display device 51 in order to suggest the player to hit right.

Further, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the normal mode if it does not win the continuous lottery process of the special mode in step S1307B.
Here, if the MPU 62 determines in step S1308B that the special mode continuous lottery has not been won, the normal mode command is set in step S1310B, and the MPU 92 receives the normal mode command in step S2119B. If it is determined that this is the case, in step S2120B, the normal mode notification process is executed based on the content of the normal mode command. In this normal mode notification process, the MPU 92 sets a normal mode notification command. This normal mode notification command is transmitted to the display control device 100 in the command transmission process in step S2005 described above.

Based on the normal mode command transmitted from the MPU 92, the MPU 102 displays a character on the display screen G of the symbol display device 51 as shown in FIG. 44 (D), and at the same time, the line “chance zone end” of this character is displayed. Notifies the player of the transition to the normal mode.
After that, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the normal mode as shown in FIG. 44 (E).

On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1308B that the special mode continuous lottery has been won, the normal mode command is not set. Therefore, the MPU 102 displays a character or a character on the display screen G of the symbol display device 51. The dialogue of this character is not displayed, and the player is not notified of the transition to the normal mode. Further, in the low frequency support mode of the special mode, the MPU 102 displays a left-pointing arrow at the upper right of the display screen G of the symbol display device 51 in order to suggest a left-handed strike to the player.

In the normal mode, the MPU 102 starts variable display of a plurality of symbol strings Z1 to Z3 (see FIG. 4A) displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 51 based on the pattern command received from the MPU 92. By doing so, it shifts to a high-speed fluctuation period. In this high-speed fluctuation period, the MPU 102 starts the fluctuation display of the symbols by periodically scrolling the symbols of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction (upward in the present embodiment).
After the lapse of the high-speed fluctuation period, the MPU 102 stops and displays some of the symbol rows (symbol row Z1 and symbol row Z3) on the effective line L (see FIG. 4 (A)) to display the same combination of symbols. By displaying and suggesting the stop result and displaying the remaining symbol sequence (symbol sequence Z2) in a variable manner in that state, the reach display is generated and the reach period is entered.

After that, the MPU 102 notifies the result of the winning / failing lottery by stopping and displaying a combination of symbols having the same number on the effective line L as the stop result based on the stop result command received from the MPU 92. After that, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the open / close execution mode.

In the process of determining the effect for the open / close execution mode, when the MPU 92 determines in step S2201 that the game result is the "high frequency support mode result", in step S2202, the effect A is performed as the effect for the open / close execution mode. Select. In this effect A, as shown in FIG. 44 (C), the MPU 102 displays a character on the display screen G of the symbol display device 51 at the end of the open / close execution mode, and at the same time, the line “RUSH rush!” Of this character is displayed. The player is notified that the game result is the "high frequency support mode result".
After that, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the high frequency support mode. In the high frequency support mode, the game mode shifts to the normal mode. In the high-frequency support mode, the MPU 102 displays the value of the game count counter RTC as the remaining number of times up to the end reference number of the high-frequency support mode (100 times in FIG. 44 (C)) based on the content of the variable command. It is displayed on the upper left of the display screen G of the device 51. Further, in the high frequency support mode, the MPU 102 displays a right-pointing arrow at the upper right of the display screen G of the symbol display device 51 in order to suggest the player to hit right.

On the other hand, in the effect determination process for the open / close execution mode, the MPU 92 determines in step S2201 that the game result is not the "high frequency support mode result", and in step S2203 that the game mode is not the special mode. If this is the case (when it is determined that the game mode is the normal mode), in step S2204B, the effect B2 is selected as the effect for the open / close execution mode. In this effect B2, as shown in FIG. 44 (F), the MPU 102 displays a character on the display screen G of the symbol display device 51 at the end of the open / close execution mode, and at the same time, the line of this character "Enter the chance zone!" Notifies the player that the game result is the "low frequency support mode result" (shifting to the special mode).

After that, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the low frequency support mode. In the low-frequency support mode, the game mode continues the special mode if it wins the continuous lottery process of the special mode in step S1307B, and shifts to the normal mode if it does not win. Further, in the low frequency support mode of the special mode, the MPU 102 displays a left-pointing arrow at the upper right of the display screen G of the symbol display device 51 in order to suggest a left-handed strike to the player.

According to such an embodiment, in addition to being able to exert the same actions / effects as (1) to (5) and (7) to (11) in the first embodiment, the following actions / effects can be obtained. Can play.
(13) Since the main control device 60 shifts the game mode to the normal mode when the normal mode lottery is won, the player pays attention to the result of the normal mode lottery. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can improve the player's attention to the game.

[Fourth Embodiment]
Hereinafter, a fourth embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.
In the following description, the parts already described will be designated by the same reference numerals and the description thereof will be omitted.

In the first embodiment, when the winning / losing lottery results in "big hit winning" and the special mode flag is set in the RAM 64, the gaming state is the open / close execution mode (that is, the round number specified mode) regardless of the current gaming state. ), The mode was changed to the special mode. When the special mode flag is set in the RAM 64, this special mode is continued until 30 game times, which is the end reference number set in the game number counter RTC, is exhausted.
On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when the special mode flag is set in the RAM 64, the special mode performs 30 or 50 game times, which is the end reference number set in the game number counter RTC. It differs from the first embodiment in that it continues until it is digested.

In the present embodiment, the main control device 60 executes a process different from that of the first embodiment. Specifically, in the present embodiment, the transition process at the end of the open / close execution mode is different from that of the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the content of the transition process at the end of the open / close execution mode in the present embodiment will be described.

FIG. 45 is a diagram showing a flowchart of a transition process at the end of the opening / closing execution mode according to the fourth embodiment of the present invention.
In the transition process at the end of the open / close execution mode, the MPU 62 executes steps S1101 to S1110C as shown in FIG. 45.
In step S1101, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the distribution result is a “high frequency support mode result”.

When the MPU 62 determines in step S1101 that the distribution result is the "high frequency support mode result", the MPU 62 executes the processes after step S1102.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1101 that the distribution result is not the "high frequency support mode result" (when the distribution result is determined to be the "low frequency support mode result"), the MPU 62 determines. The processing after step S1105 is executed.
First, in step S1101, the process when the MPU 62 determines that the distribution result is the “high frequency support mode result” (processes after step S1102) will be described.

In step S1102, the MPU 62 sets the high frequency support flag in the RAM 64. The MPU 62 maintains the high frequency support flag if it has already been set in the RAM 64. As a result, the MPU 62 sets the support mode to the high frequency support mode.
In step S1103, the special mode flag stored in the RAM 64 is cleared.

Here, the pachinko machine 10 has a plurality of game modes having different support modes, which are shifted after the opening / closing execution mode is completed. Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 has a normal mode in which the support mode is set after the opening / closing execution mode ends according to the distribution results of the "low frequency support mode result" and the "high frequency support mode result", and a "low frequency support". Regardless of the distribution result of "mode result" and "high frequency support mode result", the game mode has a special mode in which the support mode is set to the high frequency support mode after the opening / closing execution mode ends.

The special mode flag is a flag for specifying which game mode is the normal mode or the special mode. In step S1103, since the MPU 62 has cleared the special mode flag, the game mode is set to the normal mode.

In step S1104, the MPU 62 sets “100” to the value of the game count counter RTC provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64. After that, the MPU 62 ends the transition process at the end of the open / close execution mode.
Here, when the high-frequency support flag is set in the RAM 64, the high-frequency support mode continues until 100 game times, which is the end reference number set in the game number counter RTC, is exhausted. The MPU 62 clears the high frequency support flag when 100 game times have been completed. As a result, the MPU 62 sets the support mode to the low frequency support mode.

Next, in step S1101, the process when the MPU 62 determines that the distribution result is not the “high frequency support mode result” (processes after step S1105) will be described.
When the distribution result is determined not to be the "high frequency support mode result" in step S1101 (when the distribution result is determined to be the "low frequency support mode result"), the MPU 62 is determined in step S1105. It is determined whether or not the special mode flag is set in the RAM 64.

When the MPU 62 determines in step S1105 that the special mode flag is set in the RAM 64 (when it is determined that the game mode is the special mode), the MPU 62 executes the processes after step S1102 described above. In other words, when the game mode is a special mode, the MPU 62 frequently switches to the support mode after the opening / closing execution mode ends regardless of the distribution results of the "low frequency support mode result" and the "high frequency support mode result". Set to support mode.

On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1105 that the special mode flag is not set in the RAM 64 (when it is determined that the game mode is the normal mode), the MPU 62 sets the game count counter in step S1109C. Execute the process. This game count counter setting process will be described in detail later.

In step S1106, the MPU 62 clears the high frequency support flag stored in the RAM 64. As a result, the MPU 62 sets the support mode to the low frequency support mode.
In step S1107, the MPU 62 sets the special mode flag in the RAM 64. The MPU 62 maintains the special mode flag if it has already been set in the RAM 64. As a result, the MPU 62 sets the game mode to the special mode.

In step S1110C, the MPU 62 sets a special mode command. After that, the MPU 62 ends the transition process at the end of the open / close execution mode. This special mode command includes information for causing the voice emission control device 90 to recognize that the game mode is set to the special mode. The MPU 62 transmits the special mode command set in step S1110C to the voice emission control device 90 in step S301 of the normal process.
The voice emission control device 90 recognizes the transition to the special mode based on the special mode command transmitted from the MPU 62, and executes a predetermined process. This process will be described in detail later.

FIG. 46 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the game count counter setting process.
In the game count counter setting process, the MPU 62 executes steps S1401 to S1404 as shown in FIG.
In step S1401, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the high frequency support flag is set in the RAM 64. In other words, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the support mode when the "big hit win" or "small hit win" is obtained in the winning / losing lottery is the high frequency support mode.

When the support mode is determined to be the high frequency support mode in step S1401, the MPU 62 determines in step S1402 whether or not the value of the game count counter RTC is "90" or more. In other words, the MPU 62 determines whether or not a "small hit win" has been won in the winning / losing lottery after shifting to the high frequency support mode after the end of the opening / closing execution mode and before digesting the 10 game rounds.

When the MPU 62 determines in step S1402 that the value of the game count counter RTC is "90" or more, in step S1403, the value of the game count counter RTC provided in various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64 is set to "50". "Is set. After that, the MPU 62 ends the transition process at the end of the open / close execution mode.

On the other hand, the MPU 62 has a game count counter when it is determined in step S1401 that the support mode is not the high frequency support mode (when the support mode is determined to be the low frequency support mode) or in step S1402. If it is determined that the RTC value is not "90" or more, "30" is set in the value of the game count counter RTC provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64 in step S1404. After that, the MPU 62 ends the transition process at the end of the open / close execution mode.

Here, when the special mode flag is set in the RAM 64, the special mode continues until the game times of 30 or 50 times, which is the end reference number set in the game number counter RTC, are exhausted. The MPU 62 clears the special mode flag when it has completed 30 or 50 game rounds. As a result, the MPU 62 sets the game mode to the normal mode.
Here, the information relating to the number of times the special mode is continued (30 times or 50 times) is included in the above-mentioned special mode command.
After executing the process of step S1107, the MPU 62 clears the hold information stored in the hold area Rb for the second result display unit based on the winning of the game ball to the lower operating port 37.

In this way, when a hit occurs in the winning / failing lottery and the sorting result becomes the "high frequency support mode result" in the sorting lottery, the game state is the open / close execution mode regardless of the current game state. After the end, it shifts to the high frequency support mode. The high-frequency support mode shifts to the low-frequency support mode when 100 game times have been completed without a hit in the winning / losing lottery. In the high frequency support mode, the game mode is always the normal mode.

In addition, when a hit occurs in the winning / failing lottery and the sorting result becomes the "low frequency support mode result" in the sorting lottery, the game state is the open / close execution mode if the game mode is the special mode. After the end, the mode shifts to the high frequency support mode, and if the game mode is the normal mode, the mode shifts to the low frequency support mode after the end of the open / close execution mode. The high-frequency support mode shifts to the low-frequency support mode when 100 game times have been completed without a hit in the winning / losing lottery. In the high frequency support mode, the game mode is always the normal mode. The low frequency support mode continues at least until a win occurs in the winning or losing lottery. In the low frequency support mode, the game mode stays in the special mode until 30 or 50 game times are exhausted, and then shifts to the normal mode.

In addition, if there is no winning in the winning / failing lottery, that is, if the winning / failing result becomes a "normally out of order result" in the winning / failing lottery, the gaming state does not shift.

Here, the value of the game count counter RTC is included in the above-mentioned variable command and special mode command. Further, the information related to the game mode (information related to whether or not the special mode flag is set in the RAM 64) is included in the above-mentioned opening command.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the main control device 60 functions as a game state transition means for shifting the game state based on the result of the internal lottery.
Further, in the present embodiment, the low frequency support mode has a game mode of a normal mode and a special mode.

Then, in the present embodiment, the main control device 60 has a low frequency in the normal mode and the high frequency support mode of the low frequency support mode based on the result of the internal lottery (low frequency support mode result or high frequency support mode result). The game state is shifted to either the support mode or the high frequency support mode, and in the special mode of the low frequency support mode, the game state is shifted to the high frequency support mode regardless of the result of the internal lottery. According to this, the player will play with the expectation that he / she will stay in the special mode even when the gaming state is shifted to the low frequency support mode. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 is the player. It is possible to improve the degree of attention to the game.
In the present embodiment, the high-frequency support mode does not have the game mode of the special mode, but it may have it.

Further, in the present embodiment, the main control device 60 is set to the opening / closing execution mode which is advantageous for the player based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the upper operating port 36 and the lower operating port 37. When the game state is changed from the normal control state and the game state is changed from the open / close execution mode to the normal control state, the game state is changed to either the low frequency support mode or the high frequency support mode. According to this, when the player shifts to the low frequency support mode, he / she pays attention to whether or not he / she stays in the special mode. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 pays attention to the player's game. Can be improved.

Further, in the present embodiment, the right variable ball entry mechanism 40 fires toward the right-handed route based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the upper operating port 36 and the lower operating port 37. It functions as a variable ball entry mechanism that enables the ball to be entered. Then, the main control device 60 shifts the game state from the normal control state to the open / close execution mode when the game ball enters the right variable ball entry mechanism 40. Here, the probability of shifting to the open / close execution mode via the variable entry execution mode (about 1 / 12.5) is based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the lower operating port 37. , Based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the upper operating port 36, the probability of shifting to the open / close execution mode via the variable entry execution mode (about 1/60) is higher. There is. According to this, the player expects to shift the game state to the high-frequency support mode, so that the pachinko machine 10 can improve the player's attention to the game.

Further, in the present embodiment, the main control device 60 is set to either the normal mode or the special mode based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the upper operating port 36 and the lower operating port 37. Shift the game mode. Specifically, the main control device 60 shifts the gaming mode to the special mode when shifting to the low-frequency support mode, and shifts to the normal mode when shifting to the high-frequency support mode. Shift the game mode to. According to this, the player pays attention to the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the upper operating port 36 and the lower operating port 37, so that the pachinko machine 10 is the player's game. It is possible to improve the degree of attention to.
In the present embodiment, the main control device 60 shifts the gaming mode to the special mode when shifting to the low frequency support mode, and shifts the gaming state to the high frequency support mode. Although the game mode is shifted to the normal mode, the game mode may be shifted to either the normal mode or the special mode based on other conditions.

Further, in the present embodiment, after shifting the game mode to the special mode, the main control device 60 changes from the special mode to the normal mode when a predetermined number of game times (30 times or 50 times in the present embodiment) are exhausted. Shift the game mode. According to this, since the player pays attention to the number of times the game is digested, the pachinko machine 10 can improve the player's attention to the game.
In the present embodiment, the main control device 60 shifts the game mode from the special mode to the normal mode when the game mode is shifted to the special mode and then 30 or 50 game times are exhausted. , The game mode may be changed from the special mode to the normal mode when the game times other than this number of times are exhausted.

Further, in the present embodiment, the main control device 60 shifts the game mode from the special mode to the normal mode when the game mode is shifted to the special mode and then 30 or 50 game times are exhausted. For example, when the number of "small hit wins" exceeds a predetermined number as a result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning of the upper operating port 36 or the lower operating port 37, the special mode is changed to the normal mode. The game mode may be changed.

Further, in the present embodiment, the main control device 60 shifts the game mode from the special mode to the normal mode when the game mode is shifted to the special mode and then 30 or 50 game times are exhausted. For example, when the game ball is launched toward the right-handed route, the game mode may be changed from the special mode to the normal mode. In other words, the main control device 60 may end the special mode as a penalty when the game ball is launched toward the right-handed route during the stay in the special mode. According to this, the player fires the game ball toward the right-handed route in the high-frequency support mode, and fires the game ball toward the left-handed route in the low-frequency support mode in the special mode. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can surely reflect the player's intention, and the player can comfortably play the game.

Further, in the present embodiment, the low-frequency support mode result functions as the first lottery result for shifting the gaming state to either the low-frequency support mode or the high-frequency support mode, and the high-frequency support mode result is the high-frequency support mode result. It functions as a second lottery result for shifting the game state to the support mode. According to this, the pachinko machine 10 can shift the gaming state to the high-frequency support mode even when the result of the low-frequency support mode is obtained, and the opportunity to shift the gaming state to the high-frequency support mode is increased. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can improve the player's attention to the game.
Then, in the low-frequency support mode, the game state is changed to the normal mode in which the game state is shifted to the low-frequency support mode when the result of the low-frequency support mode is obtained, and the game state is changed to the high-frequency support mode when the result of the low-frequency support mode is obtained. It has a special mode to shift. According to this, the player will play with the expectation that he / she will stay in the special mode even when the gaming state is shifted to the low frequency support mode. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 is the player. It is possible to improve the degree of attention to the game.

Further, in the present embodiment, the low-frequency support mode includes a normal mode and a special mode in which the probability of transitioning to a gaming state advantageous to the player is higher than that of the normal mode. Specifically, in the present embodiment, the special mode has a higher probability of shifting to the high frequency support mode than the normal mode. According to this, the player will play with the expectation that he / she will stay in the special mode even when the gaming state is shifted to the low frequency support mode. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 is the player. It is possible to improve the degree of attention to the game.
In the present embodiment, the special mode has a higher probability of shifting to the high frequency support mode than the normal mode and is 100%, but it does not have to be 100%. In short, the special mode only needs to have a higher probability of transitioning to the high frequency support mode than the normal mode.

Then, the main control device 60 changes from the normal control state to the opening / closing execution mode which is advantageous to the player, based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the upper operating port 36 and the lower operating port 37. When the state is changed and the game state is changed from the open / close execution mode to the normal control state, the game mode is changed to either the normal mode or the special mode.
In the present embodiment, when the main control device 60 shifts the game state from the open / close execution mode to the normal control state, the game mode shifts to either the normal mode or the special mode, but other than this. The game mode may be shifted to either the normal mode or the special mode at the timing. For example, the game mode may be shifted to either the normal mode or the special mode during the digestion of the game times.

Further, in the present embodiment, the main control device 60 has the number of times the game has been digested until the game state has been changed to the open / close execution mode after the game state has been changed to the high frequency support mode, and the end reference number (this embodiment). Based on the result of comparing with the threshold value set to the number of times smaller than (100 times in the present embodiment) (90 times in this embodiment), the special mode (advantageous side gaming situation) of 50 times which is advantageous for the player and the advantageous side It is divided into 30 special modes (disadvantageous game situation) that are more disadvantageous to the player than the game situation. According to this, the player pays attention to the number of times the game is digested after the game state is changed to the high-frequency support mode and before the game state is changed to the open / close execution mode. It is possible to improve the degree of attention of the player to the game.
In the present embodiment, the advantageous side game situation is set to 50 special modes and the unfavorable side game situation is set to 30 times special mode. , The advantageous side game situation and the disadvantage side game situation may be set. In short, the advantageous side game situation may be a game situation that is advantageous to the player, and the disadvantageous side game situation may be a game situation that is more disadvantageous to the player than the advantageous side game situation.

Further, in the present embodiment, the main control device 60 reduces the number of times of digestion of the game times from the transition to the high frequency support mode to the shift to the open / close execution mode to the number of times smaller than the end reference number. When it is smaller than the set threshold value, it is distributed to the advantageous side game situation, and when it is large, it is distributed to the disadvantage side game situation. According to this, the player pays attention to the game times up to the threshold value set to the number of times smaller than the end reference number of times after shifting the game state to the high frequency support mode. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 has a pachinko machine 10. It is possible to improve the player's attention to the game.
In this embodiment, the number of times the game is digested until the game state is changed to the open / close execution mode after the game state is changed to the high-frequency support mode, and the threshold value set to be smaller than the end reference number. If it is smaller than this threshold value, it is distributed to the advantageous side game situation, and if it is larger, it is distributed to the disadvantageous side game situation, but if it is larger than this threshold value, it is distributed to the advantageous side game situation, and if it is smaller. In addition, it may be distributed to the disadvantaged game situation.

Further, in the present embodiment, the special mode includes an advantageous game situation in which the game mode is shifted from the special mode to the normal mode when 50 times (predetermined number of times) have been played, and 30 times (less than the predetermined number of times). It has a disadvantageous game situation in which the game mode is shifted from the special mode to the normal mode when the game times (number of times) are exhausted. According to this, the 30-time special mode shifts the game mode from the special mode to the normal mode when less than 50 game times are digested, so that the player is compared with the 50-time special mode. It can be a disadvantageous game situation for the player. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can improve the player's attention to the game.
In the present embodiment, as in the third embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 usually shifts the game mode to the normal mode after the main control device 60 shifts the game mode to the special mode. A normal mode lottery means for executing a mode lottery is provided, and the main control device 60 may shift the game mode to the normal mode when the normal mode lottery is won. In this case, the special mode may have an advantageous side gaming situation in which the probability of winning the normal mode lottery is low and a disadvantageous side game situation in which the probability of winning the normal mode lottery is high.
According to this, when the main control device 60 wins the normal mode lottery, the game mode shifts to the normal mode, so that the player pays attention to the result of the normal mode lottery. Further, since the disadvantageous side game situation has a high probability of winning the normal mode lottery, the game situation can be set to be disadvantageous to the player as compared with the advantageous side game situation. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can improve the player's attention to the game.

Further, in the present embodiment, the voice emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 execute a process different from that of the first embodiment. Specifically, in the present embodiment, the effect determination process is different from that of the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the content of the effect determination process in the present embodiment will be described.

<Regarding the effect determination process executed by the voice emission control device 90>
FIG. 47 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the effect determination process.
The MPU 92 of the voice emission control device 90 executes the effect determination process in order to execute the effect for the game round, the effect for the variable input ball execution mode, the effect for the open / close execution mode, and the like. In this effect determination process, as shown in FIG. 47, the MPU 92 executes the processes of steps S2101 to S2111 in the same manner as in the first embodiment, and then executes the processes of steps S2112 and subsequent steps.

In step S2112, the MPU 92 determines whether or not the opening command has been received.

When the MPU 92 determines in step S2112 that the opening command has not been received, the MPU 92 executes the processes after step S2117C.
On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines that the opening command has been received in step S2112, the MPU 92 determines the type of distribution result based on the content of the opening command in step S2113.

In step S2114C, the MPU 92 executes the effect determination process for the open / close execution mode corresponding to the type of distribution result determined in step S2113.

FIG. 48 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the effect determination process for the open / close execution mode.
The MPU 92 of the voice emission control device 90 executes the effect determination process for the open / close execution mode in order to determine the effect for the open / close execution mode. In the effect determination process for the open / close execution mode, the MPU 92 executes steps S2201 to S2204C as shown in FIG. 48.

In step S2201, the MPU 92 determines whether or not the distribution result determined in step S2113 is the “high frequency support mode result”.
When the MPU 92 determines in step S2201 that the game result is the "high frequency support mode result", the MPU 92 selects the effect A3 as the effect for the open / close execution mode in step S2202C. After that, the MPU 62 ends the effect determination process for the open / close execution mode.
On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines in step S2201 that the distribution result is not the "high frequency support mode result" (when the distribution result is determined to be the "low frequency support mode result"), the MPU 92 determines. In step S2203, based on the content of the opening command, it is determined whether or not the game mode when the "big hit win" is obtained in the winning / losing lottery is the special mode.

When the MPU 92 determines in step S2203 that the game mode is a special mode, the MPU 92 executes the processes after step S2202C described above, and selects the effect A3 as the effect for the open / close execution mode. After that, the MPU 62 ends the effect determination process for the open / close execution mode.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step S2203 that the game mode is not the special mode (when it is determined that the game mode is the normal mode), the MPU 92 is produced as an effect for the open / close execution mode in step S2204C. Select B3. After that, the MPU 62 ends the effect determination process for the open / close execution mode.
The duration of the effect A3 and the effect B3 corresponds to the time when the large winning opening 38a is opened and closed 15 times in the open / close execution mode.

Further, the MPU 92 executes the light emission control of the indicator lamp unit 23 and the voice control of the speaker unit 24 in the effect execution process of step S2003 described above based on the selection results of the effect A3 and the effect B3.

Here, the effect A3 of the present embodiment is different from the effect A of the first embodiment.
Specifically, in the effect A of the first embodiment, the MPU 102 displays a character on the display screen G of the symbol display device 51 at the end of the open / close execution mode, and at the same time, the line "RUSH rush!" Of this character is displayed. The player was notified that the game result was the "high frequency support mode result" (shifting to the normal mode) (see FIGS. 30 (B) and 31 (C)).
On the other hand, in the effect A3 of the present embodiment, the MPU 102 displays a character on the display screen G of the symbol display device 51 at the end of the open / close execution mode, and at the same time, the line of this character "Rush into RUSH! Within 10 rotations". If you win, you will get a bonus! ”Notify the player that the game result is“ high frequency support mode result ”(shift to normal mode), and if you win within 10 rotations, The subsequent special mode is different from the effect A of the first embodiment in that it notifies that the game continues until the 50 game times are exhausted.

Further, the effect B3 of the present embodiment is different from the effect B of the first embodiment.
Specifically, in the effect B of the first embodiment, the MPU 102 displays a character on the display screen G of the symbol display device 51 at the end of the open / close execution mode, and the dialogue of this character "30 rotation chance zone. The player was notified by "!" That the game result was the "low frequency support mode result" (shifting to the special mode) (see FIGS. 30 (D) and 31 (E)).
On the other hand, in the effect B3 of the present embodiment, the MPU 102 does not display the character or the dialogue of this character on the display screen G of the symbol display device 51 at the end of the open / close execution mode, and is in a special mode for the player. It is different from the effect B of the first embodiment in that it does not notify the transition to.

Returning to the description of the effect determination process, the processes after step S2115 will be described with reference to FIG. 47.
In step S2115, the MPU 92 sets a command for the open / close execution mode including information related to the effect for the open / close execution mode selected in step S2114C. This open / close execution mode command is transmitted to the display control device 100 in the command transmission process in step S2005 described above.

The MPU 102 of the display control device 100 reads from the program ROM 103 a data table for executing the effect for the open / close execution mode on the symbol display device 51 based on the open / close execution mode command transmitted from the MPU 92. Then, the MPU 102 outputs a command to the VDP 105 based on this data table every time the predetermined image update timing (for example, 20 msec cycle) is reached. As a result, the symbol display device 51 executes the effect for the open / close execution mode selected by the MPU 92 of the voice emission control device 90.

After executing the process of step S2115, or when it is determined in step S2112 that the opening command has not been received, the MPU 92 executes the processes of step S2117C and subsequent steps.

In step S2117C, the MPU 92 determines whether or not a special mode command has been received.

When the MPU 92 determines that the special mode command has been received in step S2117C, the MPU 92 executes the special mode notification process in step S2118C based on the content of the special mode command. In this special mode notification process, the MPU 92 sets a special mode notification command. This special mode notification command is transmitted to the display control device 100 in the command transmission process in step S2005 described above. Here, the special mode command includes the value of the game count counter RTC.

The MPU 102 of the display control device 100 reads from the program ROM 103 a data table for notifying the player to shift to the special mode based on the special mode notification command transmitted from the MPU 92. Then, the MPU 102 outputs a command to the VDP 105 based on this data table every time the predetermined image update timing (for example, 20 msec cycle) is reached. As a result, the symbol display device 51 notifies the player that the mode is to be changed to the special mode. Specifically, the MPU 102 displays a character on the display screen G of the symbol display device 51 at the end of the open / close execution mode, and based on the special mode notification command transmitted from the MPU 92, the line of this character "30 rotations". Notify the player of the transition to the special mode in "Chance zone!" Or "50 rotation chance zone!".

On the other hand, when it is determined in step S2117C that the special mode command has not been received, the MPU 92 executes the processes after step S2116.
In step S2116, the MPU 92 executes other processing. In other processes, the MPU 92 executes a process for advancing the effect for the open / close execution mode based on, for example, an open command, a close command, an ending command, or the like transmitted from the MPU 62. After that, the MPU 92 ends the effect determination process.

<Relationship between game results and game status>
Hereinafter, the relationship between the game result and the game state based on the execution of various processes will be described.
FIG. 49 is a diagram showing the relationship between the game result and the game state and the like. Specifically, FIG. 49 is a diagram showing the relationship between the game result excluding the “normal deviation result” and the game state, and the game results are arranged in the column direction and the game state and the like are arranged in the row direction.
As shown in FIG. 49, the pachinko machine 10 has a game mode of a normal mode and a special mode. In addition, the pachinko machine 10 has a distribution result of "high frequency support mode result" and "low frequency support mode result" as game results excluding "normal deviation result".

Hereinafter, the relationship between the game result excluding the “normal deviation result” and the game state and the like will be described. In the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 sets the relationship between the game result and the game state as follows, but the combination of the game result and the game state, the content of the game result, and the game state, etc. The contents such as the game state are arbitrary.

In the game mode of the normal mode, the contents of the game state and the like differ depending on the game results of the "high frequency support mode result" and the "low frequency support mode result".
Specifically, in the "high frequency support mode result", the opening and closing of the large winning opening 38a is executed 15 times. Further, in the "high frequency support mode result" based on the winning of the upper operating port 36, the stop result is a combination of symbols having the same odd number, and the effect for the open / close execution mode is effect A3. .. In the "high frequency support mode result" based on the winning of the lower operating port 37, the stop result is a combination of symbols having the same alphabetic characters, and the effect for the open / close execution mode is the effect A3. Further, in the "high frequency support mode result", the support mode shifts to the high frequency support mode. Then, the next game mode will be the normal mode.

Further, in the "low frequency support mode result", the opening and closing of the large winning opening 38a is executed 15 times. Further, in the "low frequency support mode result" based on the winning of the upper operating port 36, the stop result is a combination of symbols having the same even number, and the effect for the open / close execution mode is effect B3. .. In the "low frequency support mode result" based on the winning of the lower operating port 37, the stop result is a combination of symbols having the same alphabetic characters, and the effect for the open / close execution mode is the effect B3. Further, in the "low frequency support mode result", the support mode shifts to the low frequency support mode. Then, the next game mode will be the "special mode".

On the other hand, in the game mode of the "special mode", the contents of the game state and the like are the same regardless of the game results of the "high frequency support mode result" and the "low frequency support mode result".
Specifically, the opening and closing of the grand prize opening 38a is executed 15 times. Further, in the game result based on the winning of the upper operating port 36, the stop result is a combination of symbols having the same number, and the effect for the open / close execution mode is the effect A3. Further, the support mode shifts to the high frequency support mode. Then, the next game mode will be the normal mode.

Therefore, the player can grasp that the distribution result is the "high frequency support mode result" or the "low frequency support mode result" by checking the stop result and the effect for the open / close execution mode. It is possible to know that the next game mode is the normal mode or the special mode.

<About the flow after the game ball enters the right variable entry mechanism>
FIG. 50 is a diagram showing an effect for the opening / closing execution mode when a game ball wins a prize (V prize) at the right entrance.
The MPU 102 corresponds to the success of the V winning as shown in FIGS. 28 (D) and 50 (A) when the game ball wins (V winning) in the right entrance 404 in the variable ball entry execution mode. Perform the production to be done. After that, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the open / close execution mode.

In the process of determining the effect for the open / close execution mode, when the MPU 92 determines in step S2201 that the game result is the "high frequency support mode result", in step S2202C, the effect A3 is used as the effect for the open / close execution mode. Select. In this effect A3, as shown in FIG. 50 (B), the MPU 102 displays a character on the display screen G of the symbol display device 51 at the end of the open / close execution mode, and at the same time, the dialogue “RUSH rush! 10 rotations” of this character. If you win within 10 times, you will get a bonus! ”Notify the player that the game result is“ high frequency support mode result ”(shift to normal mode), and win within 10 rotations. For example, the subsequent special mode notifies that the game continues until 50 game times are exhausted.

After that, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the high frequency support mode as shown in FIG. 50 (C). In the high frequency support mode, the game mode shifts to the normal mode. In the high-frequency support mode, the MPU 102 displays the value of the game count counter RTC as the remaining number of times up to the end reference number of the high-frequency support mode (100 times in FIG. 50 (C)) based on the content of the variable command. It is displayed on the upper left of the display screen G of the device 51. Further, in the high frequency support mode, the MPU 102 displays a right-pointing arrow at the upper right of the display screen G of the symbol display device 51 in order to suggest the player to hit right.

On the other hand, in the effect determination process for the open / close execution mode, the MPU 92 determines in step S2201 that the game result is not the "high frequency support mode result", and in step S2203 that the game mode is not the special mode. If this is the case (when it is determined that the game mode is the normal mode), in step S2204C, the effect B3 is selected as the effect for the open / close execution mode.

Then, when it is determined in step S1402 that the value of the game count counter RTC is not "90" or more (see FIG. 28 (A)), the MPU 62 is provided in various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64 in step S1404. "30" is set in the value of the game count counter RTC, and a special mode command is set in step S1110C. When the MPU 92 determines that the special mode command has been received in step S2117C, the MPU 92 executes the special mode notification process in step S2118C based on the content of the special mode command. In this special mode notification process, the MPU 92 sets a special mode notification command. This special mode notification command is transmitted to the display control device 100 in the command transmission process in step S2005 described above.

Based on the special mode command transmitted from the MPU 92, the MPU 102 displays a character on the display screen G of the symbol display device 51 after the end of the open / close execution mode, as shown in FIG. 50 (D), and also displays the character's dialogue. In "30 rotation chance zone!", The player is notified that the player will shift to the special mode, and that the special mode will continue until the 30 game times are exhausted.

After that, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the low frequency support mode as shown in FIG. 50 (E). In the low frequency support mode, the game mode stays in the special mode until 30 game times are exhausted, and then shifts to the normal mode. In the special mode, the MPU 102 displays the symbol display device 51 with the value of the game count counter RTC as the remaining number of times up to the end reference number of the special mode (30 times in FIG. 50 (E)) based on the content of the variation command. Displayed in the upper left of screen G. Further, in the low frequency support mode of the special mode, the MPU 102 displays a left-pointing arrow at the upper right of the display screen G of the symbol display device 51 in order to suggest a left-handed strike to the player.
In the present embodiment, the remaining number of times up to the end reference number of times of the special mode is displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 51, but this may not be displayed.

<About the entry of the game ball into the right variable entry mechanism and the subsequent flow>
FIG. 51 is a diagram showing an effect for game rotation when a game ball wins a prize in the lower operating port triggered by winning a prize in the through gate in the high frequency support mode.
In addition, the high-frequency support mode becomes "big win" or "small win" in the winning / failing lottery, and is assigned to the "high-frequency support mode result" in the sorting lottery, or wins / loses during the stay in the special mode. It shifts to the case where it becomes a "big hit" in the lottery and is distributed to the "low frequency support mode result" in the distribution lottery. Further, FIG. 51 is a diagram showing a display screen G of the symbol display device 51 when the winning / failing result is “small hit winning”.

First, the MPU 102 starts the variable display of the plurality of symbol strings Z1 to Z3 (see FIG. 4B) displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 51 based on the pattern command received from the MPU 92. Shifts to a high-speed fluctuation period. In this high-speed fluctuation period, the MPU 102 starts the fluctuation display of the symbols by periodically scrolling the symbols of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction (upward in the present embodiment). Further, the MPU 102 displays the symbol display device 51 by setting the value of the game count counter RTC as the remaining number of times up to the end reference number of the high frequency support mode (95 times in FIG. 51 (A)) based on the content of the variation command. Displayed in the upper left of screen G.
After the high-speed fluctuation period elapses, the MPU 102 displays a part of the symbol rows (symbol row Z1 and symbol row Z3) stopped on the effective line L (see FIG. 4 (B)) as shown in FIG. 51 (A). By causing, the same combination of symbols (for example, "A") is displayed to suggest the stop result, and in that state, the remaining symbol sequence (symbol sequence Z2) is displayed in a variable manner to generate reach display. Move to the reach period.

After that, based on the stop result command received from the MPU 92, the MPU 102 stops and displays a combination of symbols having the same alphabetic characters (for example, "AAA") on the valid line L as the stop result, and as a result, the result of the winning / losing lottery. (See FIG. 28 (B)).

After the combination of symbols having the same alphabetic characters is stopped and displayed on the effective line L by the MPU 102, the MPU 62 sets the blade member 401a to the open state by executing the drive control of the blade member driving unit 401c (the blade member 401a is set to the open state). See FIG. 28 (C)).
Further, the MPU 102 generates an effect for notifying the player of the opening of the blade member based on the blade member opening command received from the MPU 92. Specifically, the MPU 102 displays a character on the entire surface of the display screen G of the symbol display device 51, and notifies the player to hit right with the dialogue of this character.

Then, the MPU 102 executes the effect for the variable ball entry execution mode based on the command for the variable ball entry execution mode received from the MPU 92.
In the production for the variable ball entry execution mode, the MPU 102 is based on the V winning success command received from the MPU 92 when the game ball wins (V winning) in the right ball entry port 404 in the variable ball entry execution mode. Perform a production corresponding to the success of the V prize. Specifically, the MPU 102 displays the character "V" on the entire surface of the display screen G of the symbol display device 51, and notifies the player that the game ball has won a prize (V prize) at the right entry port 404. (See FIG. 28 (D)).
Further, in the production for the variable ball entry execution mode, the MPU 102 receives a V prize based on the V prize failure command received from the MPU 92 when the game ball does not win (V prize) in the right ball entrance 404. Perform a production that corresponds to the failure. Specifically, the MPU 102 displays the character "sorry" on the entire surface of the display screen G of the symbol display device 51, and informs the player that the game ball did not win (V prize) at the right entry port 404. Notify (see FIG. 28 (E)).

In the variable ball entry execution mode, the MPU 102 executes an effect corresponding to the success of the V winning when the game ball wins the right entry port 404 (V winning). After that, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the open / close execution mode.

In the process of determining the effect for the open / close execution mode, when the MPU 92 determines in step S2201 that the game result is the "high frequency support mode result", in step S2202C, the effect A3 is used as the effect for the open / close execution mode. Select. In this effect A3, as shown in FIG. 51 (B), the MPU 102 displays a character on the display screen G of the symbol display device 51 at the end of the open / close execution mode, and at the same time, the dialogue “RUSH rush! 10 rotations” of this character. If you win within 10 rotations, you will be notified that the game result is "high frequency support mode result" (shift to normal mode) with "If you win within 10 times, you will get a bonus". , The special mode after that informs that it continues until 50 game times are exhausted.

After that, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the high frequency support mode as shown in FIG. 51 (C). In the high frequency support mode, the game mode shifts to the normal mode. In the high-frequency support mode, the MPU 102 displays the value of the game count counter RTC as the remaining number of times up to the end reference number of the high-frequency support mode (100 times in FIG. 51 (C)) based on the content of the variable command. It is displayed on the upper left of the display screen G of the device 51. Further, in the high frequency support mode, the MPU 102 displays a right-pointing arrow at the upper right of the display screen G of the symbol display device 51 in order to suggest the player to hit right.

On the other hand, in the effect determination process for the open / close execution mode, the MPU 92 determines in step S2201 that the game result is not the "high frequency support mode result", and in step S2203 that the game mode is not the special mode. If this is the case (when it is determined that the game mode is the normal mode), in step S2204C, the effect B3 is selected as the effect for the open / close execution mode.

Then, when it is determined in step S1402 that the value of the game count counter RTC is "90" or more (see FIG. 51 (A)), the MPU 62 is provided in various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64 in step S1404. The value of the game count counter RTC is set to "50", and a special mode command is set in step S1110C. When the MPU 92 determines that the special mode command has been received in step S2117C, the MPU 92 executes the special mode notification process in step S2118C based on the content of the special mode command. In this special mode notification process, the MPU 92 sets a special mode notification command. This special mode notification command is transmitted to the display control device 100 in the command transmission process in step S2005 described above.

Based on the special mode command transmitted from the MPU 92, the MPU 102 displays a character on the display screen G of the symbol display device 51 after the end of the open / close execution mode, as shown in FIG. 51 (D), and also displays the character's dialogue. In "50 rotation chance zone!", The player is notified that the special mode is to be entered, and the special mode is notified that the 50 rotations will be continued until the game is completed.

After that, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the low frequency support mode as shown in FIG. 51 (E). In the low frequency support mode, the game mode stays in the special mode until 50 game times are exhausted, and then shifts to the normal mode. In the special mode, the MPU 102 displays the symbol display device 51 with the value of the game count counter RTC as the remaining number of times up to the end reference number of the special mode (50 times in FIG. 51 (E)) based on the content of the variation command. Displayed in the upper left of screen G. Further, in the low frequency support mode of the special mode, the MPU 102 displays a left-pointing arrow at the upper right of the display screen G of the symbol display device 51 in order to suggest a left-handed strike to the player.
In the present embodiment, the remaining number of times up to the end reference number of times of the special mode is displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 51, but this may not be displayed.

According to such an embodiment, in addition to being able to exert the same actions / effects as (1) to (5) and (7) to (11) in the first embodiment, the following actions / effects can be obtained. Can play.
(14) Since the main control device 60 shifts the game mode from the special mode to the normal mode when the game mode is shifted to the special mode and then 30 or 50 game times are completed, the player can play the game. You will pay attention to the number of times of digestion. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can improve the player's attention to the game.

(15) The main control device 60 is set to the number of times the game is digested until the game state is changed to the open / close execution mode after the game state is changed to the high-frequency support mode, and the number of times is smaller than the end reference number. Based on the result of comparing with the threshold value, the player is divided into 50 special modes that are advantageous to the player and 30 special modes that are more disadvantageous to the player than the 50 special modes, so that the player has a high frequency. After shifting the game state to the support mode, pay attention to the number of times the game is digested until the game state is changed to the open / close execution mode. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can improve the player's attention to the game.

(16) The main control device 60 is set to the number of times the game is digested until the game state is changed to the open / close execution mode after the game state is changed to the high-frequency support mode, and the number of times is smaller than the end reference number. The threshold value is compared, and if it is smaller than this threshold value, the game is assigned to 50 special modes. Therefore, the player is set to a number smaller than the end reference number after shifting the game state to the high frequency support mode. Attention will be paid to the number of games played up to the threshold. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can improve the player's attention to the game.
(17) The 30-time special mode shifts the game mode from the special mode to the normal mode when less than 50 game times are digested, which is disadvantageous to the player as compared with the 50-time special mode. It can be a game situation. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can improve the player's attention to the game.

[Variation example of each embodiment]
The present invention is not limited to each of the above-described embodiments, and modifications, improvements, and the like within the range in which the object of the present invention can be achieved are included in the present invention.
(1) In each of the above-described embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 opens and closes the large winning opening 38a once for each round game. On the other hand, the pachinko machine 10 may open and close the large winning opening 38a a plurality of times in one round game.
(2) In each of the above-described embodiments, in the pachinko machine 10, after the opening / closing door 38b is set to the open state, a predetermined upper limit duration (upper limit duration) elapses, or a game to the large winning opening 38a. When the total number of winning balls reaches a predetermined upper limit, the opening / closing door 38b is set to the closed state again. On the other hand, for example, the upper limit number may be changed according to the upper limit duration, and the condition for setting the opening / closing door 38b to the closed state again is arbitrary.

(3) In each of the above-described embodiments, in the pachinko machine 10, after the opening / closing door 38b is set to the open state, the total number of winning balls to the large winning opening 38a reaches eight, which is a predetermined upper limit. As a result, the opening / closing door 38b was set to the closed state again. On the other hand, for example, in the pachinko machine 10, the upper limit number may be set to any number other than eight. Further, for example, the pachinko machine 10 may be set with a different upper limit number depending on the distribution result. Further, for example, the pachinko machine 10 may be set with a different upper limit number for each round in one opening / closing execution mode.

(4) In each of the above-described embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 opens and closes when the total number of winning balls to the large winning opening 38a reaches a predetermined upper limit after the opening / closing door 38b is set to the open state. The door 38b was set to the closed state again. On the other hand, for example, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with an end trigger for setting the opening / closing door 38b to the closed state when the game ball enters, and this end occurs when a predetermined time elapses. It may be configured to allow entry into the trigger.
(5) In each of the above-described embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 sets the opening / closing door 38b in the open state, and then the opening / closing door 38b is closed again after a predetermined upper limit duration (upper limit duration) elapses. Was set to. On the other hand, for example, in the pachinko machine 10, after the opening / closing door 38b is set to the open state, a predetermined time elapses from the time when a prize is generated in the large winning opening 38a, so that the opening / closing door 38b is opened. It may be set to the closed state again.

(6) In each of the above-described embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 sets the opening / closing door 38b to the open state and then sets the opening / closing door 38b to the closed state again. On the other hand, for example, the pachinko machine 10 may shift to the next round game without setting the opening / closing door 38b to the closed state again after setting the opening / closing door 38b to the open state.
(7) In each of the above-described embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 has one type of opening / closing execution mode. Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 has an open / close execution mode in which a round game is executed 15 times with an upper limit duration. On the other hand, the pachinko machine 10 may have an opening / closing execution mode different from these in terms of the mode of the upper limit duration and the number of times the round game is executed. Further, the pachinko machine 10 may be configured to set a plurality of types of opening / closing execution modes by different aspects of the upper limit duration, and instead, the degree of opening of the opening / closing door 38b such as half-open or full-open. May be configured to set a plurality of types of open / close execution modes by differentiating the above. Further, the mode of the upper limit duration may be set so that the exact upper limit duration is different although it looks the same to the player.

(8) In each of the above-described embodiments, the game result and the effect for the open / close execution mode are set in advance so as to have a one-to-one correspondence. On the other hand, for example, the effect for the open / close execution mode may be randomly selected and set from a plurality of types of effects without corresponding to the game result, and may be selected from a plurality of types of effects by lottery or the like. And the selection rate may be different depending on the game result.
(9) In each of the above-described embodiments, the MPU 62 uses the random number counter C1 for the lottery for the occurrence of the jackpot, and uses the hit type counter C2 for the lottery for the type of the jackpot when the jackpot occurs. On the other hand, the MPU 62 may use the random number counter C1 in the lottery of the jackpot type when the jackpot occurs. In this case, the hit type counter C2 may not be provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64.

(10) In each of the above-described embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 creates a gaming state that is advantageous to the player and a gaming state that is disadvantageous to the player by setting the support mode, but sets other gaming states. Thereby, a gaming state that is advantageous to the player and a gaming state that is disadvantageous to the player may be created. For example, the pachinko machine 10 may create a gaming state that is advantageous to the player and a gaming state that is disadvantageous to the player by changing the number of game times in which the high-frequency support mode is continued after the opening / closing execution mode ends. Further, for example, the pachinko machine 10 may create a gaming state that is advantageous to the player and a gaming state that is disadvantageous to the player by changing the number of game times in which the high-probability mode is continued after the opening / closing execution mode ends. ..

(11) In each of the above-described embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 stores the hold information related to the upper operating port 36 in the holding area Ra for the first result display unit, and stores the holding information related to the lower operating port 37 in the second result display unit. By storing in the holding area Rb, the holding information related to the upper operating port 36 and the holding information related to the lower operating port 37 were stored separately. On the other hand, the pachinko machine 10 may store the hold information related to the upper operating port 36 and the holding information related to the lower operating port 37 together.
(12) In each of the above-described embodiments, the MPU 62 preferentially sets the hold information related to the lower operating port 37 for digestion of the game times regardless of whether or not there is holding information related to the upper operating port 36. .. On the other hand, the MPU 62 may set the hold information related to the upper operating port 36 and the holding information related to the lower operating port 37 for the digestion of the game times in the order of winning the respective hold information.

(13) In each of the above embodiments, the main control device 60 transmits a command to the voice emission control device 90, and the voice emission control device 90 transmits a command as a result of analyzing the command to the display control device 100. Control of the display control device 100 was being executed. On the other hand, the main control device 60 transmits a command to the display control device 100, and the display control device 100 transmits a command as a result of analyzing the command to the voice emission control device 90 to control the voice emission control. Control of device 90 may be performed. The command transmitted from the main control device 60 to the voice emission control device 90 and the command transmitted from the voice emission control device 90 to the display control device 100 are not limited to the commands described in the above embodiments and are arbitrary. ..
(14) In each of the above-described embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 includes a main control device 60, a voice emission control device 90, and a display control device 100 as separate control devices. On the other hand, for example, the voice emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 may be provided as the same control device, and at least one of the voice emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 is mainly used. It may be provided as the same control device as the control device 60.

(15) In each of the above-described embodiments, the symbol display device 51 periodically scrolls the symbols in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction based on the winning of the upper operating port 36 or the lower operating port 37. By starting the variable display of the symbol, the effect for playing the game was executed on the display screen G. On the other hand, the effect for the game round is not limited to the effect described in each of the above-described embodiments, and is arbitrary. For example, the pachinko machine 10 may execute the effect of playing a game by operating the movable decorative member provided on the game board 31 in combination with the symbol display device 51. Further, for example, the pachinko machine 10 may execute the effect for game rotation by operating the light emitting means provided on the game board 31 in combination with the symbol display device 51. Further, for example, the pachinko machine 10 may execute the effect for playing games by operating these decorative members and light emitting means in combination with the symbol display device 51.

(16) In each of the above-described embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 executes an internal lottery (win / fail lottery and distribution lottery) based on winning a prize in the upper operating port 36 or the lower operating port 37, and then the main display unit 45. The symbol display device 51 executes the variation display and displays the result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning of the upper operating port 36 or the lower operating port 37 as the stop result of the variation display. On the other hand, for example, the main display unit 45 and the symbol display device 51 start the variable display before executing the internal lottery, and as a result of stopping the variable display, the internal lottery performed after the variable display is started. The result of may be displayed. In this case, after the variable display is started and before the variable display is stopped, the internal lottery may be executed and the stop result and the like may be set.

(17) In each of the above-described embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 includes a main display unit 45, and the main display unit 45 executes a variable display of a pattern and displays the result of an internal lottery as a stop result of the variable display. Was. On the other hand, for example, the main display unit 45 may display the same stop result regardless of the result of the internal lottery as the stop result of the variable display, and by displaying the stop result at random, the inside The result of the lottery may not be identifiable. Further, for example, the pachinko machine 10 does not have to include the main display unit 45.

(18) In each of the above-described embodiments, the symbol display device 51 periodically scrolls the symbols in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction based on the winning of the upper operating port 36 or the lower operating port 37. By starting the variable display of the symbol, the effect for playing the game was executed on the display screen G. On the other hand, the symbol display device 51 may execute the effect for the game round on the display screen G by displaying the symbol (design) that clearly indicates the result of the internal lottery.

For example, the symbol display device 51 sets a predetermined region in at least one of a region narrower than the region for displaying the symbols in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 and the peripheral region of the region for displaying the symbols in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. When the variable display of the symbols in the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 is stopped, a symbol that clearly indicates the result of the internal lottery may be displayed in this predetermined area. The symbols to be displayed in the predetermined area may be displayed in a variable manner or may be hidden during the variable display of the symbols in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3.

Here, as the pattern to be displayed in the predetermined area, characters, colors, and patterns that are difficult for the player to identify may be adopted, or a combination thereof may be adopted. Further, it may be difficult for the player to identify by adopting characters, colors, or patterns that are not easily identified by the player but are similar to each other or a combination thereof. According to this, for example, at the end of the game round, the manager of the pachinko / pachislot machine may win the lottery for the occurrence of a big hit by visually observing the symbol display device 51 without visually observing the main display unit 45. It is possible to easily confirm whether or not a fraudulent act is performed to cause the pachinko machine 10 to perform the above behavior.

(19) In each of the above-described embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 is configured to operate independently, but may be configured to transmit and receive information by interlocking with an external device such as a mobile phone. .. For example, the gaming machine is configured so that the player can output the optical code by operating a button or the like provided on the gaming machine, and the information of the optical code is transmitted to the camera provided on the mobile phone or the like. The gaming machine may be configured so that the information of the gaming machine can be transmitted to the web server by capturing the image, reading the image, and accessing the website. In addition, the gaming machine is configured so that the information of the web server can be received by the player entering the password issued by accessing the website into the gaming machine by operating the buttons provided on the gaming machine. You may.

(20) In each of the above-described embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 has been illustrated and described as the gaming machine of the present invention. On the other hand, the gaming machine of the present invention may be another type of pachinko machine different from the pachinko machine 10. For example, in the gaming machine of the present invention, when a gaming ball enters a specific area, It may be a pachinko machine that opens an electric accessory a predetermined number of times, or a pachinko machine that generates a jackpot right when a game ball enters a specific area. Further, the gaming machine of the present invention may be an arrangement ball machine or another type of gaming machine such as a sparrow ball.

[Invention group extracted from each embodiment]
Hereinafter, the characteristics of the invention group extracted from each of the above embodiments will be described. Among the features of the present invention group, the configurations corresponding to each of the above-described embodiments are shown in parentheses, but the features of the present invention group are not limited to the above-mentioned respective embodiments, and the features of the present invention group are characterized. Deformations, improvements, etc. within the range in which the object can be achieved, and combinations of each feature are included in the features of the present invention group.

<Characteristic A group>
Features A1.
A launching means (launching handle 27) for launching a game ball toward a game area formed on a game board and a game ball flowing down the game area are inserted, and an internal lottery is executed when the game ball enters. A gaming machine (pachinko machine 10) including starting ball entry means (upper operating port 36 and lower operating port 37) and a gaming state shifting means (main control device 60) that shifts the gaming state based on the result of the internal lottery. ) And
The game state is
A first gaming state (low frequency support mode) with a normal mode and a special mode gaming mode,
It has a second gaming state (high frequency support mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state.
In the normal mode of the first gaming state and the second gaming state, the gaming state transition means is either the first gaming state or the second gaming state based on the result of the internal lottery. In the special mode of the first gaming state, the gaming state is shifted to the second gaming state regardless of the result of the internal lottery.

According to the feature A1 of the present invention group, in the normal mode of the first gaming state and the second gaming state, the gaming state transition means is based on the result of the internal lottery, and the first gaming state and the second gaming state. The gaming state is shifted to one of the states, and in the special mode of the first gaming state, the gaming state is shifted to the second gaming state regardless of the result of the internal lottery, so that the player is in the first gaming state. Even if the game state is changed to, the game is played with the expectation that the player is staying in the special mode. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature A2.
In the gaming machine described in the feature A1 of the present invention group,
Based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the starting ball entry means, the game state transition means changes from the normal control state to a specific control state (open / close execution mode) which is advantageous for the player. When the state is changed and the gaming state is changed from the specific control state to the normal control state, the gaming state is changed to either the first gaming state or the second gaming state. Gaming machine.

According to the feature A2 of the present invention group, when the gaming state shifts from the specific control state to the normal control state, the gaming state shifting means shifts the gaming state to either the first gaming state or the second gaming state. Since the transition is made, the player pays attention to whether or not he / she is staying in the special mode when the transition is made to the first gaming state. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature A3.
In the gaming machine described in the feature A2 of the present invention group,
The starting ball entry means
The first starting ball entry part (upper operating port 36) and
It is provided with a second starting ball entering portion (lower operating port 37) different from the first starting ball entering portion.
The first gaming state has a higher probability of entering the first starting ball entry section than the second starting ball entry section, and the second gaming state has a higher probability of entering the first starting ball entry section than the first starting ball entry section. A gaming machine characterized in that, by increasing the probability of entering the second starting ball entry portion, the gaming state becomes more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state.

According to the feature A3 of the present invention group, the probability that the first game state enters the first start ball entry section is higher than that of the second start ball entry section, and the second gaming state is the first start ball entry section. Since the probability of entering the second starting ball entry section is higher than that of the ball entry section, the player launches the game ball aiming at the first starting ball entry section in the first gaming state, and the second game ball is launched. In the game state, the game ball is launched aiming at the second starting ball entry portion. Therefore, the gaming machine can clearly suggest the first gaming state and the second gaming state to the player.

Feature A4.
In the gaming machine described in the feature A3 of the present invention group,
The game area is
A first route (left-handed route) in which it is easy to generate a game ball into the first start ball entry portion and it is difficult to generate a game ball into the second start ball entry portion.
It is provided with a second route (right-handed route) that makes it easy to generate a game ball into the second start ball entry portion and makes it difficult to generate a game ball into the first start ball entry portion. Based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the starting ball entry means, the variable ball entry mechanism (right side variable entry) that enables the game ball launched toward the second path to enter the ball. Equipped with a ball mechanism 40)
The game state transition means shifts the game state from the normal control state to the specific control state when the game ball enters the variable ball entry mechanism.
Based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the second start ball entry section, the probability of shifting to the specific control state is the probability that the game ball enters the first start ball entry section. A gaming machine characterized in that the probability of shifting to the specific control state is higher than the probability of shifting to the specific control state based on the result of the internal lottery executed at the time.

According to the feature A4 of the present invention group, the probability of shifting to the specific control state based on the result of the internal lottery executed at the time of entering the game ball into the second starting ball entering portion is determined by the first starting ball entering portion. The player expects to shift the gaming state to the second gaming state because it is higher than the probability of transitioning to the specific control state based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the gaming ball enters the ball. It will be. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature A5.
In the gaming machine described in any of the features A1 to A4 of the present invention group.
The game state transition means shifts the game mode to either the normal mode or the special mode based on the result of an internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the starting ball entry means. A game machine to be.

According to the feature A5 of the present invention group, the game state transition means is placed in either a normal mode or a special mode based on the result of an internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the starting ball entry means. Therefore, the player pays attention to the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the starting ball entry means. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature A6.
In the gaming machine described in any of the features A1 to A4 of the present invention group.
A special mode lottery means (transition process at the end of the open / close execution mode) for executing a special mode lottery for whether or not to shift the game mode to the special mode is provided.
The game state transition means shifts the game mode to the normal mode when the special mode lottery is not won, and shifts the game mode to the special mode when the special mode lottery is won. Pachinko machine.

According to the feature A6 of the present invention group, the game state transition means shifts the game mode to the normal mode when the special mode lottery is not won, and shifts the game mode to the special mode when the special mode lottery is won. Therefore, the player pays attention to the result of the special mode lottery. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature A7.
In the gaming machine described in any of the features A1 to A6 of the present invention group.
The gaming state transition means is a gaming machine characterized in that after shifting the gaming mode to the special mode, the gaming mode is shifted from the special mode to the normal mode when a predetermined number of game times have been digested.

According to the feature A7 of the present invention group, the game state transition means shifts the game mode from the special mode to the normal mode when the game mode is shifted to the special mode and then the game times are exhausted a predetermined number of times. The person will pay attention to the number of times the game is digested. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature A8.
In the gaming machine described in any of the features A1 to A6 of the present invention group.
A normal mode lottery means (variation end processing) for executing a normal mode lottery as to whether or not to shift the game mode to the normal mode after shifting the game mode to the special mode by the game state transition means is provided.
The gaming state transition means is a gaming machine characterized in that when the normal mode lottery is won, the gaming mode is shifted to the normal mode.

According to the feature A8 of the present invention group, the gaming state transition means shifts the gaming mode to the normal mode when the normal mode lottery is won, so that the player pays attention to the result of the normal mode lottery. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

According to the feature A group of the present invention as described above, the player's attention to the game can be improved, so that the following problems can be solved.

Conventionally, a launching means for launching a game ball toward a game area formed on a game board, and a starting ball entry means for inserting a game ball flowing down the game area and executing an internal lottery when the game ball enters. A game machine equipped with and is known.
The gaming machine executes an internal lottery such as a jackpot lottery when the gaming ball enters the starting ball entry means, and shifts the gaming state based on the result of the internal lottery. In such a gaming machine, the gaming state has a low frequency support mode (first gaming state) and a high frequency support mode (second gaming state) that is more advantageous for the player than the low frequency support mode. ing. Therefore, the player will play the game with the expectation that the mode will shift to the high frequency support mode.

However, when the gaming state is changed from the second gaming state to the first gaming state, the player must play in the first gaming state, which is more disadvantageous than the second gaming state. There is a problem that the player's attention to the game is lowered, and the game may be stopped immediately.

<Characteristic B group>
Feature B1.
A launching means (launching handle 27) for launching a game ball toward a game area formed on a game board and a game ball flowing down the game area are inserted, and an internal lottery is executed when the game ball enters. A gaming machine (pachinko machine 10) including starting ball entry means (upper operating port 36 and lower operating port 37) and a gaming state shifting means (main control device 60) that shifts the gaming state based on the result of the internal lottery. ) And
The game state is
The first game state (low frequency support mode) and
It has a second gaming state (high frequency support mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state.
The result of the internal lottery is
A first lottery result (low frequency support mode result) for shifting the gaming state to either the first gaming state or the second gaming state, and
A gaming machine characterized by including a second lottery result (high frequency support mode result) for shifting the gaming state to the second gaming state.

According to the feature B1 of the present invention group, the result of the internal lottery is the result of the first lottery that shifts the gaming state to either the first gaming state or the second gaming state, and the game to the second gaming state. Since the gaming machine is provided with the second lottery result for shifting the state, the gaming machine can shift the gaming state to the second gaming state even when the first lottery result is obtained, and the second lottery state can be changed. It is possible to increase the chance of shifting the gaming state to the gaming state of. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature B2.
In the gaming machine described in the feature B1 of the present invention group,
The first gaming state is
A normal mode in which the gaming state is transferred to the first gaming state when the first lottery result is obtained, and
A gaming machine characterized by having a special mode for shifting the gaming state to the second gaming state when the first lottery result is obtained.

According to the feature B2 of the present invention group, the first gaming state is a normal mode in which the gaming state is shifted to the first gaming state when the first lottery result is obtained, and the first lottery result. In some cases, the player has a special mode for shifting the gaming state to the second gaming state, so that the player expects to stay in the special mode even when the gaming state is shifted to the first gaming state. And play. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature B3.
In the gaming machine described in the feature B2 of the present invention group,
Based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the starting ball entry means, the game state transition means changes from the normal control state to a specific control state (open / close execution mode) which is advantageous for the player. When the state is changed and the gaming state is changed from the specific control state to the normal control state, the gaming state is changed to either the first gaming state or the second gaming state. Gaming machine.

According to the feature B3 of the present invention group, when the gaming state shifts from the specific control state to the normal control state, the gaming state shifts to either the first gaming state or the second gaming state. Since the transition is made, the player pays attention to whether or not he / she is staying in the special mode when the transition is made to the first gaming state. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature B4.
In the gaming machine described in the feature B3 of the present invention group,
The starting ball entry means
The first starting ball entry part (upper operating port 36) and
It is provided with a second starting ball entering portion (lower operating port 37) different from the first starting ball entering portion.
The first gaming state has a higher probability of entering the first starting ball entry section than the second starting ball entry section, and the second gaming state has a higher probability of entering the first starting ball entry section than the first starting ball entry section. A gaming machine characterized in that, by increasing the probability of entering the second starting ball entry portion, the gaming state becomes more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state.

According to the feature B4 of the present invention group, the first gaming state has a higher probability of entering the first starting ball entry section than the second starting ball entry section, and the second gaming state is the first start ball entry section. Since the probability of entering the second starting ball entry section is higher than that of the ball entry section, the player launches the game ball aiming at the first starting ball entry section in the first gaming state, and the second game ball is launched. In the game state, the game ball is launched aiming at the second starting ball entry portion. Therefore, the gaming machine can clearly suggest the first gaming state and the second gaming state to the player.

Feature B5.
In the gaming machine described in the feature B4 of the present invention group,
The game area is
A first route (left-handed route) in which it is easy to generate a game ball into the first start ball entry portion and it is difficult to generate a game ball into the second start ball entry portion.
It is provided with a second route (right-handed route) that makes it easy to generate a game ball into the second start ball entry portion and makes it difficult to generate a game ball into the first start ball entry portion. Based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the starting ball entry means, the variable ball entry mechanism (right side variable entry) that enables the game ball launched toward the second path to enter the ball. Equipped with a ball mechanism 40)
The game state transition means shifts the game state from the normal control state to the specific control state when the game ball enters the variable ball entry mechanism.
Based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the second start ball entry section, the probability of shifting to the specific control state is the probability that the game ball enters the first start ball entry section. A gaming machine characterized in that the probability of shifting to the specific control state is higher than the probability of shifting to the specific control state based on the result of the internal lottery executed at the time.

According to the feature B5 of the present invention group, the probability of shifting to the specific control state based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the second starting ball entering portion is determined by the first starting ball entering portion. The player expects to shift the gaming state to the second gaming state because it is higher than the probability of transitioning to the specific control state based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the gaming ball enters the ball. It will be. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature B6.
In the gaming machine described in any of the features B2 to B5 of the present invention group.
The game state transition means shifts the game mode to either the normal mode or the special mode based on the result of an internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the starting ball entry means. A game machine to be.

According to the feature B6 of the present invention group, the game state transition means is placed in either a normal mode or a special mode based on the result of an internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the starting ball entry means. Therefore, the player pays attention to the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the starting ball entry means. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature B7.
In the gaming machine described in any of the features B2 to B5 of the present invention group.
A special mode lottery means (transition process at the end of the open / close execution mode) for executing a special mode lottery for whether or not to shift the game mode to the special mode is provided.
The game state transition means shifts the game mode to the normal mode when the special mode lottery is not won, and shifts the game mode to the special mode when the special mode lottery is won. Pachinko machine.

According to the feature B7 of the present invention group, the game state transition means shifts the game mode to the normal mode when the special mode lottery is not won, and shifts the game mode to the special mode when the special mode lottery is won. Therefore, the player pays attention to the result of the special mode lottery. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature B8.
In the gaming machine described in any of the features B2 to B7 of the present invention group.
The gaming state transition means is a gaming machine characterized in that after shifting the gaming mode to the special mode, the gaming mode is shifted from the special mode to the normal mode when a predetermined number of game times have been digested.

According to the feature B8 of the present invention group, the game state transition means shifts the game mode from the special mode to the normal mode when the game mode is shifted to the special mode and then the game times are exhausted a predetermined number of times. The person will pay attention to the number of times the game is digested. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature B9.
In the gaming machine described in any of the features B2 to B7 of the present invention group.
A normal mode lottery means (variation end processing) for executing a normal mode lottery as to whether or not to shift the game state to the normal mode after shifting the game mode to the special mode by the game state transition means is provided.
The gaming state transition means is a gaming machine characterized in that when the normal mode lottery is won, the gaming mode is shifted to the normal mode.

According to the feature B9 of the present invention group, the gaming state transition means shifts the gaming mode to the normal mode when the normal mode lottery is won, so that the player pays attention to the result of the normal mode lottery. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

According to the feature B group of the present invention as described above, the player's attention to the game can be improved, so that the following problems can be solved.

Conventionally, a launching means for launching a game ball toward a game area formed on a game board, and a starting ball entry means for inserting a game ball flowing down the game area and executing an internal lottery when the game ball enters. A game machine equipped with and is known.
The gaming machine executes an internal lottery such as a jackpot lottery when the gaming ball enters the starting ball entry means, and shifts the gaming state based on the result of the internal lottery. In such a gaming machine, the gaming state has a low frequency support mode (first gaming state) and a high frequency support mode (second gaming state) that is more advantageous for the player than the low frequency support mode. ing. Therefore, the player will play the game with the expectation that the mode will shift to the high frequency support mode.

However, since the first gaming state and the transition destination of the second gaming state are associated with the result of the internal lottery, there is a problem that the player's attention to the game is lowered.

<Characteristic C group>
Feature C1.
A launching means (launching handle 27) for launching a game ball toward a game area formed on a game board and a game ball flowing down the game area are inserted, and an internal lottery is executed when the game ball enters. A gaming machine (pachinko machine 10) including starting ball entry means (upper operating port 36 and lower operating port 37) and a gaming state shifting means (main control device 60) that shifts the gaming state based on the result of the internal lottery. ) And
The game state is
The first game state (low frequency support mode) and
It has a second gaming state (high frequency support mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state.
The first gaming state is
Normal mode and
It has a special mode in which the probability of transitioning to a gaming state advantageous to the player is higher than that of the normal mode.
The gaming state transition means shifts the gaming mode to the special mode when the gaming state shifts to the first gaming state, and shifts the gaming state to the second gaming state, the normal mode. A gaming machine characterized by shifting the gaming mode to.

According to the feature C1 of the present invention group, the first gaming state includes a normal mode and a special mode in which the probability of shifting to a gaming state advantageous to the player is higher than that of the normal mode. When the gaming state is shifted to the first gaming state, the gaming mode is shifted to the special mode, and when the gaming state is shifted to the second gaming state, the gaming mode is shifted to the normal mode. , Even when the gaming state is shifted to the first gaming state, the game is played with the expectation that the player is staying in the special mode. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature C2.
In the gaming machine described in the feature C1 of the present invention group,
Based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the starting ball entry means, the game state transition means changes from the normal control state to a specific control state (open / close execution mode) which is advantageous for the player. When the state is changed and the gaming state is changed from the specific control state to the normal control state, the gaming state is changed to either the first gaming state or the second gaming state. Gaming machine.

According to the feature C2 of the present invention group, when the gaming state shifts from the specific control state to the normal control state, the gaming state shifting means shifts the gaming state to either the first gaming state or the second gaming state. Since the transition is made, the player pays attention to whether or not he / she is staying in the special mode when the transition is made to the first gaming state. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature C3.
In the gaming machine described in the feature C2 of the present invention group,
The starting ball entry means
The first starting ball entry part (upper operating port 36) and
It is provided with a second starting ball entering portion (lower operating port 37) different from the first starting ball entering portion.
The first gaming state has a higher probability of entering the first starting ball entry section than the second starting ball entry section, and the second gaming state has a higher probability of entering the first starting ball entry section than the first starting ball entry section. A gaming machine characterized in that, by increasing the probability of entering the second starting ball entry portion, the gaming state becomes more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state.

According to the feature C3 of the present invention group, the first gaming state has a higher probability of entering the first starting ball entry section than the second starting ball entry section, and the second gaming state is the first start ball entry section. Since the probability of entering the second starting ball entry section is higher than that of the ball entry section, the player launches the game ball aiming at the first starting ball entry section in the first gaming state, and the second game ball is launched. In the game state, the game ball is launched aiming at the second starting ball entry portion. Therefore, the gaming machine can clearly suggest the first gaming state and the second gaming state to the player.

Feature C4.
In the gaming machine described in the feature C3 of the present invention group,
The game area is
A first route (left-handed route) in which it is easy to generate a game ball into the first start ball entry portion and it is difficult to generate a game ball into the second start ball entry portion.
It is provided with a second route (right-handed route) that makes it easy to generate a game ball into the second start ball entry portion and makes it difficult to generate a game ball into the first start ball entry portion. Based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the starting ball entry means, the variable ball entry mechanism (right side variable entry) that enables the game ball launched toward the second path to enter the ball. Equipped with a ball mechanism 40)
The game state transition means shifts the game state from the normal control state to the specific control state when the game ball enters the variable ball entry mechanism.
Based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the second start ball entry section, the probability of shifting to the specific control state is the probability that the game ball enters the first start ball entry section. A gaming machine characterized in that the probability of shifting to the specific control state is higher than the probability of shifting to the specific control state based on the result of the internal lottery executed at the time.

According to the feature C4 of the present invention group, the probability of shifting to the specific control state based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the second starting ball entering portion is determined by the first starting ball entering portion. The player expects to shift the gaming state to the second gaming state because it is higher than the probability of transitioning to the specific control state based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the gaming ball enters the ball. It will be. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature C5.
In the gaming machine described in any of the features C1 to C4 of the present invention group.
The game state transition means shifts the game mode to either the normal mode or the special mode based on the result of an internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the starting ball entry means. A game machine to be.

According to the feature C5 of the present invention group, the game state transition means is placed in either a normal mode or a special mode based on the result of an internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the starting ball entry means. Therefore, the player pays attention to the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the starting ball entry means. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature C6.
In the gaming machine described in any of the features C1 to C4 of the present invention group.
A special mode lottery means (transition process at the end of the open / close execution mode) for executing a special mode lottery for whether or not to shift the game mode to the special mode is provided.
The game state transition means shifts the game mode to the normal mode when the special mode lottery is not won, and shifts the game mode to the special mode when the special mode lottery is won. Pachinko machine.

According to the feature C6 of the present invention group, the game state transition means shifts the game mode to the normal mode when the special mode lottery is not won, and shifts the game mode to the special mode when the special mode lottery is won. Therefore, the player pays attention to the result of the special mode lottery. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature C7.
In the gaming machine described in any of the features C1 to C6 of the present invention group.
The gaming state transition means is a gaming machine characterized in that after shifting the gaming mode to the special mode, the gaming mode is shifted from the special mode to the normal mode when a predetermined number of game times have been digested.

According to the feature C7 of the present invention group, the game state transition means shifts the game mode from the special mode to the normal mode when the game mode is shifted to the special mode and then the game times are exhausted a predetermined number of times. The person will pay attention to the number of times the game is digested. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature C8.
In the gaming machine described in any of the features C1 to C6 of the present invention group.
A normal mode lottery means (variation end processing) for executing a normal mode lottery as to whether or not to shift the game mode to the normal mode after shifting the game mode to the special mode by the game state transition means is provided.
The gaming state transition means is a gaming machine characterized in that when the normal mode lottery is won, the gaming mode is shifted to the normal mode.

According to the feature C8 of the present invention group, the gaming state transition means shifts the gaming mode to the normal mode when the normal mode lottery is won, so that the player pays attention to the result of the normal mode lottery. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

According to the feature C group of the present invention as described above, the player's attention to the game can be improved, so that the following problems can be solved.

Conventionally, a launching means for launching a game ball toward a game area formed on a game board, and a starting ball entry means for inserting a game ball flowing down the game area and executing an internal lottery when the game ball enters. A game machine equipped with and is known.
The gaming machine executes an internal lottery such as a jackpot lottery when the gaming ball enters the starting ball entry means, and shifts the gaming state based on the result of the internal lottery. In such a gaming machine, the gaming state has a low frequency support mode (first gaming state) and a high frequency support mode (second gaming state) that is more advantageous for the player than the low frequency support mode. ing. Therefore, the player will play the game with the expectation that the mode will shift to the high frequency support mode.

However, when the gaming state is shifted from the second gaming state to the first gaming state, the player must play in the first gaming state, which is more disadvantageous than the second gaming state. There is a problem that the player's attention to the game is lowered, and the game may be stopped immediately.

<Feature D group>
Feature D1.
A launching means (launching handle 27) for launching a game ball toward a game area formed on a game board and a game ball flowing down the game area are inserted, and an internal lottery is executed when the game ball enters. A gaming machine (pachinko machine 10) including starting ball entry means (upper operating port 36 and lower operating port 37) and a gaming state shifting means (main control device 60) that shifts the gaming state based on the result of the internal lottery. ) And
The game state is
The first game state (low frequency support mode) and
It has a second gaming state (high frequency support mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state.
The first gaming state is
Normal mode and
It has a special mode in which the probability of transitioning to a gaming state advantageous to the player is higher than that of the normal mode.
The game state transition means includes a normal mode lottery means (variation end processing) that executes a normal mode lottery as to whether or not to shift the game mode to the normal mode after shifting the game mode to the special mode.
The gaming state transition means is a gaming machine characterized in that when the normal mode lottery is won, the gaming mode is shifted to the normal mode.

According to the feature D1 of the present invention group, the first gaming state includes a normal mode and a special mode in which the probability of transitioning to a gaming state advantageous to the player is higher than that of the normal mode. , Even when the gaming state is shifted to the first gaming state, the game is played with the expectation that the player is staying in the special mode. Then, since the game state transition means shifts the game mode to the normal mode when the normal mode lottery is won, the player pays attention to the result of the normal mode lottery. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature D2.
In the gaming machine described in the feature D1 of the present invention group,
Based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the starting ball entry means, the game state transition means changes from the normal control state to a specific control state (open / close execution mode) which is advantageous for the player. When the state is changed and the gaming state is changed from the specific control state to the normal control state, the gaming state is changed to either the first gaming state or the second gaming state. Gaming machine.

According to the feature D2 of the present invention group, when the gaming state shifts from the specific control state to the normal control state, the gaming state shifts to either the first gaming state or the second gaming state. Since the transition is made, the player pays attention to whether or not he / she is staying in the special mode when the transition is made to the first gaming state. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature D3.
In the gaming machine described in the feature D2 of the present invention group,
The starting ball entry means
The first starting ball entry part (upper operating port 36) and
It is provided with a second starting ball entering portion (lower operating port 37) different from the first starting ball entering portion.
The first gaming state has a higher probability of entering the first starting ball entry section than the second starting ball entry section, and the second gaming state has a higher probability of entering the first starting ball entry section than the first starting ball entry section. A gaming machine characterized in that, by increasing the probability of entering the second starting ball entry portion, the gaming state becomes more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state.

According to the feature D3 of the present invention group, the first gaming state has a higher probability of entering the first starting ball entry section than the second starting ball entry section, and the second gaming state is the first start ball entry section. Since the probability of entering the second starting ball entry section is higher than that of the ball entry section, the player launches the game ball aiming at the first starting ball entry section in the first gaming state, and the second game ball is launched. In the game state, the game ball is launched aiming at the second starting ball entry portion. Therefore, the gaming machine can clearly suggest the first gaming state and the second gaming state to the player.

Feature D4.
In the gaming machine described in the feature D3 of the present invention group,
The game area is
A first route (left-handed route) in which it is easy to generate a game ball into the first start ball entry portion and it is difficult to generate a game ball into the second start ball entry portion.
It is provided with a second route (right-handed route) that makes it easy to generate a game ball into the second start ball entry portion and makes it difficult to generate a game ball into the first start ball entry portion. Based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the starting ball entry means, the variable ball entry mechanism (right side variable entry) that enables the game ball launched toward the second path to enter the ball. Equipped with a ball mechanism 40)
The game state transition means shifts the game state from the normal control state to the specific control state when the game ball enters the variable ball entry mechanism.
Based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the second start ball entry section, the probability of shifting to the specific control state is the probability that the game ball enters the first start ball entry section. A gaming machine characterized in that the probability of shifting to the specific control state is higher than the probability of shifting to the specific control state based on the result of the internal lottery executed at the time.

According to the feature D4 of the present invention group, the probability of shifting to the specific control state based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the second starting ball entering portion is determined by the first starting ball entering portion. The player expects to shift the gaming state to the second gaming state because it is higher than the probability of transitioning to the specific control state based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the gaming ball enters the ball. It will be. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature D5.
In the gaming machine described in any of the features D1 to D4 of the present invention group.
The game state transition means shifts the game mode to either the normal mode or the special mode based on the result of an internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the starting ball entry means. A game machine to be.

According to the feature D5 of the present invention group, the game state transition means is placed in either a normal mode or a special mode based on the result of an internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the starting ball entry means. Therefore, the player pays attention to the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the starting ball entry means. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature D6.
In the gaming machine described in any of the features D1 to D4 of the present invention group.
A special mode lottery means (transition process at the end of the open / close execution mode) for executing a special mode lottery for whether or not to shift the game mode to the special mode is provided.
The game state transition means shifts the game mode to the normal mode when the special mode lottery is not won, and shifts the game mode to the special mode when the special mode lottery is won. Pachinko machine.

According to the feature D6 of the present invention group, the game state transition means shifts the game mode to the normal mode when the special mode lottery is not won, and shifts the game mode to the special mode when the special mode lottery is won. Therefore, the player pays attention to the result of the special mode lottery. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

According to the feature D group of the present invention as described above, the player's attention to the game can be improved, so that the following problems can be solved.

Conventionally, a launching means for launching a game ball toward a game area formed on a game board, and a starting ball entry means for inserting a game ball flowing down the game area and executing an internal lottery when the game ball enters. A game machine equipped with and is known.
The gaming machine executes an internal lottery such as a jackpot lottery when the gaming ball enters the starting ball entry means, and shifts the gaming state based on the result of the internal lottery. In such a gaming machine, the gaming state has a low frequency support mode (first gaming state) and a high frequency support mode (second gaming state) that is more advantageous for the player than the low frequency support mode. ing. Therefore, the player will play the game with the expectation that the mode will shift to the high frequency support mode.

However, when the gaming state is shifted from the second gaming state to the first gaming state, the player must play in the first gaming state, which is more disadvantageous than the second gaming state. There is a problem that the player's attention to the game is lowered, and the game may be stopped immediately.

<Feature E group>
Feature E1.
A launching means (launching handle 27) for launching a game ball toward a game area formed on a game board and a game ball flowing down the game area are inserted, and an internal lottery is executed when the game ball enters. A gaming machine (pachinko machine 10) including starting ball entry means (upper operating port 36 and lower operating port 37) and a gaming state shifting means (main control device 60) that shifts the gaming state based on the result of the internal lottery. ) And
The game state is
The first game state (low frequency support mode) and
It continues until the end reference number of game times is exhausted, and has a second game state (high frequency support mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the first game state.
The game state transition means changes from the normal control state to a specific control state (open / close execution mode) which is advantageous to the player, based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the starting ball entry means. After shifting the state and shifting the gaming state to the second gaming state, the number of times the game is digested until the gaming state is shifted to the specific control state is set to a number smaller than the end reference number. Based on the result of comparison with the threshold value, the advantageous side gaming situation (50 times special mode) that is advantageous to the player and the disadvantageous side gaming situation (30 times special mode) that is more disadvantageous to the player than the advantageous side gaming situation. ) And a gaming machine characterized by sorting.

According to the feature E1 of the present invention group, the game state transition means is the number of times the game is digested and the number of times the game is terminated until the game state is changed to the specific control state after the game state is changed to the second game state. Based on the result of comparing with the threshold value set to a smaller number of times, the game is divided into an advantageous side game situation that is advantageous to the player and a disadvantageous side game situation that is more disadvantageous to the player than the advantageous side game situation. The person pays attention to the number of times the game is digested until the game state is changed to the specific control state after the game state is changed to the second game state. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature E2.
In the gaming machine described in the feature E1 of the present invention group,
The gaming state transition means is set to the number of times the game is digested until the gaming state is shifted to the specific control state after the gaming state is shifted to the second gaming state, and the number of times is smaller than the end reference number. A gaming machine characterized in that the threshold value is compared with the threshold value, and when the threshold value is smaller than the threshold value, the gaming machine is assigned to the advantageous side gaming situation, and when the threshold value is larger than the threshold value, the gaming machine is assigned to the disadvantageous gaming situation.

According to the feature E2 of the present invention group, the gaming state transition means is the number of times the game is digested and the number of times the game is terminated until the game state is changed to the specific control state after the game state is changed to the second game state. The threshold value set to a smaller number of times is compared, and if it is smaller than this threshold value, it is distributed to the advantageous side gaming situation. Therefore, the player shifts the gaming state to the second gaming state and then ends the reference number of times. Attention will be paid to the game times up to the threshold set to a smaller number of times. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature E3.
In the gaming machine described in the feature E2 of the present invention group,
The first gaming state is
Normal mode and
It has a special mode in which the probability of transitioning to a gaming state advantageous to the player is higher than that of the normal mode.
The gaming state transition means is a gaming machine characterized in that when the gaming state is shifted from the specific control state to the normal control state, the gaming mode is shifted to either the normal mode or the special mode.

According to the feature E3 of the present invention group, the first gaming state includes a normal mode and a special mode in which the probability of transitioning to a gaming state advantageous to the player is higher than that of the normal mode. , Even when the gaming state is shifted to the first gaming state, the game is played with the expectation that the player is staying in the special mode. Then, when the game state transition means shifts the game state from the specific control state to the normal control state, the game mode shifts to either the normal mode or the special mode, so that the player shifts to the special mode. We will pay attention to whether or not. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature E4.
In the gaming machine described in the feature E3 of the present invention group,
After shifting the game mode to the special mode, the game state transition means shifts the game mode from the special mode to the normal mode when a predetermined number of game times have been digested.
The special mode is
The advantageous side game situation in which the game mode is shifted from the special mode to the normal mode when a predetermined number of game times are exhausted, and
A gaming machine characterized in that it has the disadvantageous gaming situation in which the gaming mode is shifted from the special mode to the normal mode when the gaming times are less than a predetermined number of times.

According to the feature E4 of the present invention group, the game state transition means shifts the game mode from the special mode to the normal mode when the game mode is shifted to the special mode and then the game times are exhausted a predetermined number of times. The person will pay attention to the number of times the game is digested. In addition, the disadvantageous game situation shifts the game mode from the special mode to the normal mode when the number of game times less than the predetermined number is digested, so that the game situation is disadvantageous to the player as compared with the advantageous side game situation. Can be. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature E5.
In the gaming machine described in the feature E3 of the present invention group,
A normal mode lottery means (variation end processing) for executing a normal mode lottery as to whether or not to shift the game mode to the normal mode after shifting the game mode to the special mode by the game state transition means is provided.
When the game state transition means wins the normal mode lottery, the game mode shifts to the normal mode, and the game mode shifts to the normal mode.
The special mode is
The advantageous side game situation with a low probability of winning the normal mode lottery, and
A gaming machine characterized by having the disadvantaged gaming situation with a high probability of winning the normal mode lottery.

According to the feature E5 of the present invention group, the gaming state transition means shifts the gaming mode to the normal mode when the normal mode lottery is won, so that the player pays attention to the result of the normal mode lottery. Further, since the disadvantageous side game situation has a high probability of winning the normal mode lottery, the game situation can be set to be disadvantageous to the player as compared with the advantageous side game situation. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature E6.
In the gaming machine described in any of the features E3 to E5 of the present invention group.
The game state transition means shifts the game mode to either the normal mode or the special mode based on the result of an internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the starting ball entry means. A game machine to be.

According to the feature E6 of the present invention group, the game state transition means is placed in either a normal mode or a special mode based on the result of an internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the starting ball entry means. Therefore, the player pays attention to the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the starting ball entry means. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature E7.
In the gaming machine described in any of the features E3 to E5 of the present invention group.
A special mode lottery means (transition process at the end of the open / close execution mode) for executing a special mode lottery for whether or not to shift the game mode to the special mode is provided.
The game state transition means shifts the game mode to the normal mode when the special mode lottery is not won, and shifts the game mode to the special mode when the special mode lottery is won. Pachinko machine.

According to the feature E7 of the present invention group, the game state transition means shifts the game mode to the normal mode when the special mode lottery is not won, and shifts the game mode to the special mode when the special mode lottery is won. Therefore, the player pays attention to the result of the special mode lottery. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature E8.
In the gaming machine described in any of the features E1 to E7 of the present invention group,
The gaming state transition means is characterized in that when the gaming state is shifted from the specific control state to the normal control state, the gaming state is shifted to either the first gaming state or the second gaming state. A game machine to be.

According to the feature E8 of the present invention group, when the gaming state shifts from the specific control state to the normal control state, the gaming state shifting means shifts the gaming state to either the first gaming state or the second gaming state. Since the transition is made, the player pays attention to whether or not he / she is staying in the special mode when the transition is made to the first gaming state. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature E9.
In the gaming machine described in the feature E8 of the present invention group,
The starting ball entry means
The first starting ball entry part (upper operating port 36) and
It is provided with a second starting ball entering portion (lower operating port 37) different from the first starting ball entering portion.
The first gaming state has a higher probability of entering the first starting ball entry section than the second starting ball entry section, and the second gaming state has a higher probability of entering the first starting ball entry section than the first starting ball entry section. A gaming machine characterized in that, by increasing the probability of entering the second starting ball entry portion, the gaming state becomes more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state.

According to the feature E9 of the present invention group, the probability that the first game state enters the first start ball entry section is higher than that of the second start ball entry section, and the second gaming state is the first start ball entry section. Since the probability of entering the second starting ball entry section is higher than that of the ball entry section, the player launches the game ball aiming at the first starting ball entry section in the first gaming state, and the second game ball is launched. In the game state, the game ball is launched aiming at the second starting ball entry portion. Therefore, the gaming machine can clearly suggest the first gaming state and the second gaming state to the player.

Feature E10.
In the gaming machine described in the feature E9 of the present invention group,
The game area is
A first route (left-handed route) in which it is easy to generate a game ball into the first start ball entry portion and it is difficult to generate a game ball into the second start ball entry portion.
It is provided with a second route (right-handed route) that makes it easy to generate a game ball into the second start ball entry portion and makes it difficult to generate a game ball into the first start ball entry portion. Based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the starting ball entry means, the variable ball entry mechanism (right side variable entry) that enables the game ball launched toward the second path to enter the ball. Equipped with a ball mechanism 40)
The game state transition means shifts the game state from the normal control state to the specific control state when the game ball enters the variable ball entry mechanism.
Based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the second start ball entry section, the probability of shifting to the specific control state is the probability that the game ball enters the first start ball entry section. A gaming machine characterized in that the probability of shifting to the specific control state is higher than the probability of shifting to the specific control state based on the result of the internal lottery executed at the time.

According to the feature E10 of the present invention group, the probability of shifting to the specific control state based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the second starting ball entering portion is determined by the first starting ball entering portion. The player expects to shift the gaming state to the second gaming state because it is higher than the probability of transitioning to the specific control state based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the gaming ball enters the ball. It will be. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

According to the feature E group of the present invention as described above, the degree of attention of the player to the game can be improved, so that the following problems can be solved.

Conventionally, a launching means for launching a game ball toward a game area formed on a game board, and a starting ball entry means for inserting a game ball flowing down the game area and executing an internal lottery when the game ball enters. A game machine equipped with and is known.
The gaming machine executes an internal lottery such as a jackpot lottery when the gaming ball enters the starting ball entry means, and shifts the gaming state based on the result of the internal lottery. In such a gaming machine, the gaming state has a low frequency support mode (first gaming state) and a high frequency support mode (second gaming state) that is more advantageous for the player than the low frequency support mode. ing. Therefore, the player will play the game with the expectation that the mode will shift to the high frequency support mode.

However, the second gaming state continues until the end reference number of gaming times is exhausted, and the gaming machine is based on the result of the internal lottery regardless of the timing of winning the jackpot lottery in the second gaming state. Since the game state has been changed, there is a problem that the player's attention to the game is reduced.

<Characteristic F group>
Features F1.
A launching means (launching handle 27) for launching a game ball toward a game area formed on a game board and a game ball flowing down the game area are inserted, and an internal lottery is executed when the game ball enters. A gaming machine (pachinko machine 10) including starting ball entry means (upper operating port 36 and lower operating port 37) and a gaming state shifting means (main control device 60) that shifts the gaming state based on the result of the internal lottery. ) And
A variable ball entry mechanism (right variable ball entry mechanism 40) that enables the game ball to be entered based on the result of an internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the starting ball entry means.
The game state is
The first time saving state (high frequency support mode) that makes it easier to enter the variable ball entry mechanism, and
It is provided with a second time saving state (low frequency support mode of special mode) that makes it difficult to enter the variable ball entry mechanism as compared with the first time saving state.
The gaming state transition means is a gaming machine characterized in that the gaming state is shifted from the normal control state to a specific control state (opening / closing execution mode) which is advantageous for the player when the game ball enters the variable ball entry mechanism. ..

According to the feature F1 of the present invention group, in the gaming state, it becomes difficult to enter the variable ball entry mechanism as compared with the first time saving state in which the ball is easily entered into the variable ball entry mechanism and the first time saving state. Since it has a second time saving state, it is possible to diversify the types of game states that can shift the game state from the normal control state to the specific control state when the game ball enters the variable ball entry mechanism. it can. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature F2.
In the gaming machine described in the feature F1 of the present invention group,
The starting ball entry means
The first starting ball entry part (upper operating port 36) and
It is provided with a second starting ball entering portion (lower operating port 37) different from the first starting ball entering portion.
The game area is
A first route (left-handed route) in which it is easy to generate a game ball into the first start ball entry portion and it is difficult to generate a game ball into the second start ball entry portion.
It is provided with a second route (right-handed route) that facilitates the entry of the game ball into the second start entry portion and makes it difficult for the game ball to enter the first start entry portion.
The variable ball entry mechanism makes it possible to enter a game ball launched toward the second path based on the result of an internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the starting ball entry means. A gaming machine characterized by that.

According to the feature F2 of the present invention group, the player launches the game ball toward the second path in the first time saving state, and the game ball toward the first path in the second time saving state. Will be fired. Therefore, the gaming machine can surely reflect the player's intention, and the player can comfortably play the game.

Feature F3.
In the gaming machine described in the feature F1 or the feature F2 of the present invention group
The game state is
A first gaming state (low frequency support mode) having a gaming mode of a normal mode and the second time saving state as a special mode, and
It has a second gaming state (high frequency support mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state.
In the normal mode of the first gaming state and the second gaming state, the gaming state transition means is either the first gaming state or the second gaming state based on the result of the internal lottery. In the special mode of the first gaming state, the gaming state is shifted to the second gaming state regardless of the result of the internal lottery.

According to the feature F3 of the present invention group, in the normal mode of the first gaming state and the second gaming state, the gaming state transition means is based on the result of the internal lottery, and the first gaming state and the second gaming state. The gaming state is shifted to one of the states, and in the special mode of the first gaming state, the gaming state is shifted to the second gaming state regardless of the result of the internal lottery, so that the player is in the first gaming state. Even if the game state is changed to, the game is played with the expectation that the player is staying in the special mode. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature F4.
In the gaming machine described in the feature F3 of the present invention group,
The gaming state transition means shifts the gaming state from the normal control state to the specific control state based on the result of an internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the starting ball entry means, and the specific control A gaming machine characterized in that when the gaming state is shifted from the state to the normal control state, the gaming state is shifted to either the first gaming state or the second gaming state.

According to the feature F4 of the present invention group, when the gaming state shifts from the specific control state to the normal control state, the gaming state shifts to either the first gaming state or the second gaming state. Since the transition is made, the player pays attention to whether or not he / she is staying in the special mode when the transition is made to the first gaming state. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature F5.
In the gaming machine described in the feature F3 or the feature F4 of the present invention group
The game state transition means shifts the game mode to either the normal mode or the special mode based on the result of an internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the starting ball entry means. A game machine to be.

According to the feature F5 of the present invention group, the game state transition means is placed in either a normal mode or a special mode based on the result of an internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the starting ball entry means. Therefore, the player pays attention to the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the starting ball entry means. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature F6.
In the gaming machine described in the feature F3 or the feature F4 of the present invention group
A special mode lottery means (transition process at the end of the open / close execution mode) for executing a special mode lottery for whether or not to shift the game mode to the special mode is provided.
The game state transition means shifts the game mode to the normal mode when the special mode lottery is not won, and shifts the game mode to the special mode when the special mode lottery is won. Pachinko machine.

According to the feature F6 of the present invention group, the game state transition means shifts the game mode to the normal mode when the special mode lottery is not won, and shifts the game mode to the special mode when the special mode lottery is won. Therefore, the player pays attention to the result of the special mode lottery. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature F7.
In the gaming machine described in the feature F3 or the feature F4 of the present invention group
The gaming state transition means is a gaming machine characterized in that after shifting the gaming mode to the special mode, the gaming mode is shifted from the special mode to the normal mode when a predetermined number of game times have been digested.

According to the feature F7 of the present invention group, the game state transition means shifts the game mode from the special mode to the normal mode when the game mode is shifted to the special mode and then the game times are exhausted a predetermined number of times. The person will pay attention to the number of times the game is digested. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature F8.
In the gaming machine described in the feature F3 or the feature F4 of the present invention group
A normal mode lottery means (variation end processing) for executing a normal mode lottery as to whether or not to shift the game mode to the normal mode after shifting the game mode to the special mode by the game state transition means is provided.
The gaming state transition means is a gaming machine characterized in that when the normal mode lottery is won, the gaming mode is shifted to the normal mode.

According to the feature F8 of the present invention group, the gaming state transition means shifts the gaming mode to the normal mode when the normal mode lottery is won, so that the player pays attention to the result of the normal mode lottery. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

According to the feature F group of the present invention as described above, the player's attention to the game can be improved, so that the following problems can be solved.

Conventionally, a launching means for launching a game ball toward a game area formed on a game board, and a starting ball entry means for inserting a game ball flowing down the game area and executing an internal lottery when the game ball enters. A game machine equipped with and is known.
The gaming machine executes an internal lottery such as a jackpot lottery when the gaming ball enters the starting ball entry means, and shifts the gaming state based on the result of the internal lottery. In such a gaming machine, the gaming state has a low frequency support mode (first gaming state) and a high frequency support mode (second gaming state) that is more advantageous for the player than the low frequency support mode. ing. Therefore, the player will play the game with the expectation that the mode will shift to the high frequency support mode.

Further, as a kind of such a gaming machine, a game provided with a variable ball entry mechanism that enables the game ball to be entered based on the result of an internal lottery executed when the game ball is entered into the starting ball entry means. The machine is known.
This gaming machine shifts the gaming state from the normal control state to a specific control state (open / close execution mode) that is advantageous to the player, based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the gaming ball enters the starting ball entry means. However, it is provided with a game state transition means for shifting the game state from the normal control state to the specific control state when the game ball enters the variable ball entry mechanism.
The high-frequency support mode is in a state more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state by making it easier to enter the variable ball entry mechanism.

However, when the gaming state is shifted from the second gaming state to the first gaming state, the player must play in the first gaming state, which is more disadvantageous than the second gaming state. There is a problem that the player's attention to the game is lowered, and the game may be stopped immediately.

<Characteristic G group>
Features G1.
A launching means (launching handle 27) for launching a game ball toward a game area formed on a game board and a game ball flowing down the game area are inserted, and an internal lottery is executed when the game ball enters. A gaming machine (pachinko machine 10) including starting ball entry means (upper operating port 36 and lower operating port 37) and a gaming state shifting means (main control device 60) that shifts the gaming state based on the result of the internal lottery. ) And
The starting ball entry means
The first starting ball entry part (upper operating port 36) and
It is provided with a second starting ball entering portion (lower operating port 37) different from the first starting ball entering portion.
The game area is
A first route (left-handed route) in which it is easy to generate a game ball into the first start ball entry portion and it is difficult to generate a game ball into the second start ball entry portion.
It is provided with a second route (right-handed route) that facilitates the entry of the game ball into the second start entry portion and makes it difficult for the game ball to enter the first start entry portion.
The game state is
By launching the game ball toward the second path, the first time saving state (high frequency support mode), which is advantageous for the player, and
By firing the game ball toward the second path, the second time saving state (low frequency support mode of the special mode), which is a disadvantageous situation for the player as compared with the first time saving state, is established. Prepare,
The gaming machine
A variable ball entry mechanism (variable on the right side) that enables a game ball launched toward the second path to be entered based on the result of an internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the starting ball entry means. Equipped with a ball entry mechanism 40)
The gaming state transition means is a gaming machine characterized in that the gaming state is shifted from the normal control state to a specific control state (opening / closing execution mode) which is advantageous for the player when the game ball enters the variable ball entry mechanism. ..

According to the feature G1 of the present invention group, the gaming state is directed to the first time saving state and the second path, which are advantageous situations for the player by firing the game ball toward the second path. By launching the game ball, the player has a second time-saving state, which is disadvantageous to the player as compared with the first time-saving state. Therefore, when the game ball enters the variable ball entry mechanism. It is possible to diversify the types of gaming states that can shift the gaming state from the normal control state to the specific control state. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature G2.
In the gaming machine described in the feature G1 of the present invention group,
The gaming state transition means is characterized in that when a gaming ball is launched toward the second path during the stay in the second time saving state, the gaming state transitioning means ends the second time saving state. ..

According to the feature G2 of the present invention group, the gaming state transition means ends the second time saving state when the game ball is launched toward the second path during the stay in the second time saving state. In the first time saving state, the player fires the game ball toward the second path, and in the second time saving state, the player fires the game ball toward the first path. Therefore, the gaming machine can surely reflect the player's intention, and the player can comfortably play the game.

Feature G3.
In the gaming machine described in the feature G1 or the feature G2 of the present invention group
The game state is
A first gaming state (low frequency support mode) having a gaming mode of a normal mode and the second time saving state as a special mode, and
It has a second gaming state (high frequency support mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state.
In the normal mode of the first gaming state and the second gaming state, the gaming state transition means is either the first gaming state or the second gaming state based on the result of the internal lottery. In the special mode of the first gaming state, the gaming state is shifted to the second gaming state regardless of the result of the internal lottery.

According to the feature G3 of the present invention group, in the normal mode of the first gaming state and the second gaming state, the gaming state transition means is based on the result of the internal lottery, and the first gaming state and the second gaming state. The gaming state is shifted to one of the states, and in the special mode of the first gaming state, the gaming state is shifted to the second gaming state regardless of the result of the internal lottery, so that the player is in the first gaming state. Even if the game state is changed to, the game is played with the expectation that the player is staying in the special mode. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature G4.
In the gaming machine described in the feature G3 of the present invention group,
The gaming state transition means shifts the gaming state from the normal control state to the specific control state based on the result of an internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the starting ball entry means, and the specific control A gaming machine characterized in that when the gaming state is shifted from the state to the normal control state, the gaming state is shifted to either the first gaming state or the second gaming state.

According to the feature G4 of the present invention group, when the gaming state shifts from the specific control state to the normal control state, the gaming state shifts to either the first gaming state or the second gaming state. Since the transition is made, the player pays attention to whether or not he / she is staying in the special mode when the transition is made to the first gaming state. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature G5.
In the gaming machine described in the feature G3 or the feature G4 of the present invention group
The game state transition means shifts the game mode to either the normal mode or the special mode based on the result of an internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the starting ball entry means. A game machine to be.

According to the feature G5 of the present invention group, the game state transition means is placed in either a normal mode or a special mode based on the result of an internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the starting ball entry means. Therefore, the player pays attention to the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the starting ball entry means. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature G6.
In the gaming machine described in the feature G3 or the feature G4 of the present invention group
A special mode lottery means (transition process at the end of the open / close execution mode) for executing a special mode lottery for whether or not to shift the game mode to the special mode is provided.
The game state transition means shifts the game mode to the normal mode when the special mode lottery is not won, and shifts the game mode to the special mode when the special mode lottery is won. Pachinko machine.

According to the feature G6 of the present invention group, the game state transition means shifts the game mode to the normal mode when the special mode lottery is not won, and shifts the game mode to the special mode when the special mode lottery is won. Therefore, the player pays attention to the result of the special mode lottery. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature G7.
In the gaming machine described in the feature G3 or the feature G4 of the present invention group
The gaming state transition means is a gaming machine characterized in that after shifting the gaming mode to the special mode, the gaming mode is shifted from the special mode to the normal mode when a predetermined number of game times have been digested.

According to the feature G7 of the present invention group, the game state transition means shifts the game mode from the special mode to the normal mode when the game mode is shifted to the special mode and then the game times are exhausted a predetermined number of times. The person will pay attention to the number of times the game is digested. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature G8.
In the gaming machine described in the feature G3 or the feature G4 of the present invention group
A normal mode lottery means (variation end processing) for executing a normal mode lottery as to whether or not to shift the game mode to the normal mode after shifting the game mode to the special mode by the game state transition means is provided.
The gaming state transition means is a gaming machine characterized in that when the normal mode lottery is won, the gaming mode is shifted to the normal mode.

According to the feature G8 of the present invention group, the gaming state transition means shifts the gaming mode to the normal mode when the normal mode lottery is won, so that the player pays attention to the result of the normal mode lottery. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

According to the feature G group of the present invention as described above, the degree of attention of the player to the game can be improved, so that the following problems can be solved.

Conventionally, a launching means for launching a game ball toward a game area formed on a game board, and a starting ball entry means for inserting a game ball flowing down the game area and executing an internal lottery when the game ball enters. A game machine equipped with and is known.
The gaming machine executes an internal lottery such as a jackpot lottery when the gaming ball enters the starting ball entry means, and shifts the gaming state based on the result of the internal lottery. In such a gaming machine, the gaming state has a low frequency support mode (first gaming state) and a high frequency support mode (second gaming state) that is more advantageous for the player than the low frequency support mode. ing. Therefore, the player will play the game with the expectation that the mode will shift to the high frequency support mode.

Further, as a kind of such a gaming machine, a game provided with a variable ball entry mechanism that enables the game ball to be entered based on the result of an internal lottery executed when the game ball is entered into the starting ball entry means. The machine is known.
This gaming machine shifts the gaming state from the normal control state to a specific control state (open / close execution mode) that is advantageous to the player, based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the gaming ball enters the starting ball entry means. However, it is provided with a game state transition means for shifting the game state from the normal control state to the specific control state when the game ball enters the variable ball entry mechanism.
The high-frequency support mode is in a state more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state by making it easier to enter the variable ball entry mechanism.

However, when the gaming state is shifted from the second gaming state to the first gaming state, the player must play in the first gaming state, which is more disadvantageous than the second gaming state. There is a problem that the player's attention to the game is lowered, and the game may be stopped immediately.

As described above, the present invention can be suitably used for gaming machines such as pachinko gaming machines.

10 ... Pachinko machine, 35 ... General winning opening, 36 ... Upper operating port, 37 ... Lower operating port, 38 ... Variable winning device, 38a ... Large winning opening, 38b ... Opening and closing door, 38c ... Variable winning drive unit, 39 ... Out Mouth, 40 ... right variable ball entry mechanism, 51 ... symbol display device, 60 ... main control device, 62 ... MPU, 90 ... voice emission control device, 92 ... MPU, 100 ... display control device, 102 ... MPU.

Claims (1)

A launching means for launching a game ball toward a game area formed on a game board, and a starting ball entry means for inserting a game ball flowing down the game area and executing an internal lottery when the game ball enters. , A gaming machine provided with a gaming state transition means for shifting the gaming state based on the result of the internal lottery.
The game state is
The first game state and
It has a second gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state.
The result of the internal lottery is
The first lottery result of shifting the gaming state to either the first gaming state or the second gaming state, and
A gaming machine characterized by including a second lottery result for shifting the gaming state to the second gaming state.

Images